Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

CANoe Manual en

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 209

CANoe

DENoe
.CAN.LIN.MOST.FlexRay

Manual
Version 4.1

Vector Informatik GmbH, Ingersheimer Str. 24, D-70499 Stuttgart


Tel. +49 711 80670-0, Fax +49 711 80670 111
Email can@vector-informatik.de, Internet http://www.vector-informatik.de
III

Subsidiaries

France Sweden
Vector France SAS VecScan AB
168, Boulevard Camélinat Fabriksgatan 7
F-92240 Malakoff S-41250 Göteborg
Tel.: +33 1 4231 4000 Tel.: +46 031 79901 35
Fax: +33 1 4231 4009 Fax: +46 031 79903 05
http://www.vector-france.com http://www.vecscan.com/

Japan USA
Vector Japan Co., Ltd. Vector CANtech, Inc.
Nishikawa Bldg. 2F Suite 550
3-3-9 Nihonbashi, Chuo-ku 39500 Orchard Hill Place
J-103-0027 Tokyo USA-Novi, Mi 48375
Tel.: +81 3 3516 7850 Tel.: +1 248 449 9290
Fax: +81 3 3516 7855 Fax: +1 248 449 9704
http://www.vector-japan.co.jp http://www.vector-cantech.com

For Distributor Addresses please have a look on our website:


www.vector-informatik.com

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


IV

International Quality Standard Certificate


The Quality Management of Vector Informatik GmbH is being certified throughout
since 1998-08-19:
• 2001-11-27
according to DIN EN ISO 9001:2000-12
Certificate number: 70 100 1498
• 1998-08-19
according to DIN EN ISO 9001:1994-08
Certificate number: 70 100 F 1498 TMS

Typographic Conventions

Identifies important notes


Note:

• Identifies enumerations (bullet items)

Î '1.0 Introduction' Identifies references to further chapters of this manual

[OK] Notation for buttons in dialogs

<TAB> Notation for keys on the computer keyboard

<Strg>+<Z> Notation for keys of the computer keyboard which should be


pressed simultaneously
Add… Notation for menu, command and dialog names
File│File open…
on message 0x100 Notation for MS-DOS syntax or program code

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


V

Notes on the new naming convention

CANoe CANalyzer
DENoe DENalyzer
The multi-bus functionality and die modular configuration concept of the program
variants require a new naming convention of several Vector products.
Included bus options are now indicated with a "." (DOT) followed by the name of the
bus system.

Examples:
for the LIN option: .LIN
for the MOST option: .MOST

The products CANoe resp. CANalyzer always contain the CAN option; therefore
".CAN" is never listed as a bus option. All further contained options are specified as
shown above.
The products DENoe resp. DENalyzer aim at users that exclusively use one or some
of the bus systems LIN, MOST or FlexRay; here the CAN option is not included.

Examples for CANoe:


• CANoe (tool for CAN users)
• CANoe.LIN (tool for CAN and LIN users)
• CANoe.LIN.MOST (tool for CAN, LIN and MOST users)

Examples for DENoe: (DEN: Distributed Embedded Network)


• DENoe.LIN (tool for LIN users)
• DENoe.LIN.MOST (tool for LIN and MOST users)
• DENoe.LIN.MOST.FlexRay (tool for LIN, MOST and FlexRay users)

Additional Notes
• Practice parts (CANoe tour / CANalyzer tour) are currently only available for
CANoe resp. CANalyzer (not for the bus options LIN, MOST, FlexRay).
• In the manual and online help basically the terms CANoe and CANalyzer are
used.
• The terms DENoe resp. DENalyzer are used in manual and online help to show
differences to CANoe resp. CANalyzer.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


VI

Contents

1 Introduction..........................................................................................................1

1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................1


1.2 Tips for Using CANoe....................................................................................3
1.2.1 Menus .............................................................................................4
1.2.2 Dialogs .............................................................................................4
1.2.3 Measurement and Simulation Setup ..................................................6
1.2.4 Online Help ........................................................................................7
1.3 CANoe Tour...................................................................................................7
1.3.1 Preparations .......................................................................................8
1.3.2 Setting Up the CAN Bus.....................................................................9
1.3.3 Transmitting Data ............................................................................. 11
1.3.4 Evaluation Windows .........................................................................15
1.3.5 Working with Symbolic Data.............................................................17
1.3.6 Analysis of Signal Values in the Data Window .................................19
1.3.7 Analysis of Signal Responses in the Graphics Window ...................21
1.3.8 Use of the Database in Transmitting Messages ...............................22
1.3.9 Logging a Measurement...................................................................22
1.3.10 Evaluating a Log File........................................................................24
1.3.11 Creating a CAPL Program................................................................24
1.3.12 Simulation of Distributed Systems in CANoe ...................................27
1.3.12.1 Creating the Database .......................................................27
1.3.12.2 Creating Panels .................................................................28
1.3.12.3 Creating Network Node Models .........................................30
1.3.13 Tips for Solving Your Own Tasks ......................................................31
1.4 Overview of the Programs...........................................................................32
1.5 CANoe Architecture.....................................................................................33
1.6 Particularities of the Demo Version .............................................................35

2 Applications .......................................................................................................36

2.1 Simulation/ Simulation Setup ......................................................................40


2.1.1 Working in the Simulation Setup ......................................................40
2.1.2 Gateway ...........................................................................................40
2.1.3 System View.....................................................................................41
2.1.4 Object View ......................................................................................41
2.1.5 System Verification...........................................................................41

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


VII

2.2 Measurement/Measurement Setup .............................................................42


2.2.1 Measurement Start ...........................................................................42
2.2.2 Working with Configurations.............................................................43
2.2.3 Representation Formats ...................................................................44
2.3 Working with Databases..............................................................................45
2.3.1 Creating and Modifying Databases ..................................................45
2.3.2 Access to Database Information.......................................................46
2.3.3 Associating the Database.................................................................47
2.3.4 Use of Multiple Databases ...............................................................48
2.3.5 Resolving Ambiguities ......................................................................48
2.3.6 Checking for Consistency of Symbolic Data.....................................49
2.4 Working with Multiple Channels ..................................................................49
2.4.1 Channel Definition ............................................................................49
2.4.2 Channels in Online Mode .................................................................50
2.4.3 Channels in Simulation Mode...........................................................50
2.4.4 Channels in Offline Mode .................................................................51
2.5 CANoe in Load and Overload Operation.....................................................51
2.5.1 Behavior in Load Situations..............................................................51
2.5.2 Behavior with Data Loss...................................................................52
2.5.3 Fill Level Indicator ............................................................................52
2.5.4 Optimizing Performance...................................................................53
2.5.5 Configuration Options at High Bus Load ..........................................53
2.6 Working with Panels and Environment Variables ........................................55
2.6.1 Assigning and Positioning Panels ....................................................55
2.6.2 Panel Configuration Dialog...............................................................55
2.6.3 Initialization of Environment Variables..............................................58
2.6.4 Panel Control ...................................................................................58
2.6.5 Configuring the Panel Control for Small Models...............................59
2.7 Logging and Evaluation of Measurement Files ...........................................59
2.7.1 Logging Triggers...............................................................................60
2.7.1.1 Trigger Modes....................................................................60
2.7.1.2 Trigger Events....................................................................63
2.7.1.3 Time window ......................................................................63
2.7.1.4 Configuration of the Logging Buffer ...................................64
2.7.2 Log Files...........................................................................................65
2.7.3 Event Types in Log Files ..................................................................66
2.7.4 Data Analysis in Offline Mode...........................................................67
2.7.4.1 Flow Control in Offline Mode..............................................68

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


VIII

2.7.4.2 Configuration of Online and Offline Modes ........................68


2.7.5 Trigger and Search Conditions.........................................................69
2.7.5.1 Condition Primitives ...........................................................69
2.7.5.2 Entry or Change of Primitives (without Database) .............70
2.7.5.3 Entry or Change of Primitives (with Database) ..................71
2.7.6 Exporting and Converting Log Files .................................................72
2.7.6.1 Export ................................................................................72
2.7.6.2 Conversion.........................................................................72
2.7.7 CANlog support ................................................................................72
2.8 COM-Server ................................................................................................73
2.9 Troubleshooting...........................................................................................73
2.10 List of Error Messages to the CAN Interface ...............................................74
2.11 The Interface to the Hardware.....................................................................78
2.11.1 Configuring the Hardware ................................................................79
2.11.2 Programming the Bus Parameters ...................................................80
2.11.3 Acceptance Filtering.........................................................................82
2.11.4 Card and Driver Options...................................................................84

3 Windows.............................................................................................................85

3.1 Simulation Setup .........................................................................................85


3.1.1 Configuration of the Simulation Setup ..............................................85
3.1.2 Layout of the Simulation Setup ........................................................87
3.2 Measurement Setup Window ......................................................................87
3.2.1 Data Flow in the Measurement Setup ..............................................87
3.2.2 Configuration of the Measurement Setup.........................................88
3.2.3 Working with Evaluation Blocks in the Measurement Setup.............89
3.2.4 Message Attributes...........................................................................90
3.2.5 Simulation Mode...............................................................................91
3.3 Trace Window .............................................................................................93
3.3.1 Standard Configuration of the Trace Window...................................95
3.3.2 Configuration of Columns in the Trace Window ...............................98
3.3.3 Trace Window Options from the Toolbar ..........................................99
3.3.4 Detail View (Trace Watch Functionality)...........................................99
3.3.5 Optimizing the Trace Window ..........................................................99
3.4 Graphic Window ........................................................................................100
3.4.1 Selecting Signals............................................................................101
3.4.2 Arrangement of Signals..................................................................102
3.4.3 Signal Layout .................................................................................102

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


IX

3.4.3.1 Line Types........................................................................103


3.4.3.2 Display Modes .................................................................103
3.4.4 Configuration of the Measurement .................................................103
3.4.5 Measurement and Display Functions .............................................104
3.4.6 Signal Modes .................................................................................104
3.4.7 Measurement Modes......................................................................105
3.4.8 Display Modes................................................................................106
3.4.9 Layout Functions ............................................................................106
3.4.10 Export of Signals ............................................................................108
3.4.11 Toolbar of the Graphics Window ....................................................108
3.4.12 Optimization of the Graphics Window ............................................108
3.5 Write Window ............................................................................................ 110
3.6 The Data Window...................................................................................... 111
3.6.1 Configuration of Signals ................................................................. 111
3.6.2 Display Types ................................................................................. 112
3.6.3 Activity Indicator ............................................................................. 114
3.6.4 Peak Indicator ................................................................................ 114
3.6.5 Optimization of Data Display .......................................................... 114
3.7 Statistics Window ...................................................................................... 115
3.7.1 Direct Display in the Statistics Window........................................... 115
3.7.2 Statistics Report ............................................................................. 116
3.7.3 Choosing a Histogram.................................................................... 117
3.8 Bus Statistics Window ............................................................................... 118

4 Blocks and Filter..............................................................................................120

4.1 Generator Block ........................................................................................121


4.1.1 Configuration of Triggering .............................................................122
4.1.2 Configuration of Transmit List.........................................................122
4.1.3 Entry of Signal Values ....................................................................123
4.1.4 Entry of Mode-Dependent Signals..................................................124
4.1.5 Function Generator for the Transmit List ........................................124
4.2 Interactive Generator Block (IG)................................................................126
4.2.1 Configuring the Interactive Generator Block...................................127
4.2.1.1 Transmit List ....................................................................127
4.2.1.2 Value Generator...............................................................128
4.2.1.3 Trigger Condition..............................................................128
4.2.1.4 Generating a High-Load Situation....................................128
4.2.1.5 Entering Signal Values .....................................................129

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


X

4.2.1.6 Entering Mode-Dependent Signals ..................................129


4.2.1.7 Keyboard Control .............................................................129
4.2.2 The Interactive Generator Block as a Gateway..............................130
4.3 Replay Block .............................................................................................131
4.3.1 Replay of Environment Variables ...................................................131
4.3.2 Example of an ASCII Replay File with Environment Variables .......132
4.4 Trigger block..............................................................................................132
4.5 Filter block.................................................................................................133
4.6 Channel Filter ............................................................................................134
4.7 CAPL Nodes in the Simulation Setup........................................................135
4.8 CAPL Nodes in the Measurement Setup...................................................137
4.9 Environment Variable Filters in the Measurement Setup ..........................138
4.9.1 Pass and Stop Filters for Environment Variables ...........................138
4.9.2 Configuration of the Environment Variable Filter ............................138
4.9.3 Selecting Environment Variables....................................................138
4.9.4 Examples of Preselection of Environment Variables ......................139
4.10 Break.........................................................................................................139

5 The Panel Editor ..............................................................................................140

5.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................140


5.2 Editing a Panel ..........................................................................................143
5.3 Display and Control Elements ...................................................................143
5.3.1 Creating Elements..........................................................................143
5.3.2 Configuration of the Elements ........................................................145
5.3.3 Arranging the Control Elements .....................................................145
5.4 The ActiveX control ...................................................................................147
5.4.1 The ActiveX control wizard .............................................................147
5.5 The Hexadecimal Editor ............................................................................148
5.6 Working with Bitmap Controls ...................................................................149
5.6.1 Bitmap File Format .........................................................................149
5.6.2 Configuration of Bitmap Elements ..................................................150
5.6.3 Color Resolution of Bitmaps ...........................................................151
5.7 Overlapping...............................................................................................152
5.7.1 Transparency Color........................................................................152
5.7.2 Background Bitmaps ......................................................................152
5.8 Test Mode .................................................................................................152

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


XI

5.9 Panel Control ............................................................................................153

6 CAPL Programming.........................................................................................154

6.1 Overview ...................................................................................................154


6.1.1 Potential Applications of CAPL Programs.......................................154
6.1.2 Integration of CAPL Programs........................................................155
6.1.3 Use of the Symbolic Database in CAPL .........................................156
6.1.4 Introduction to CAPL ......................................................................156
6.2 CAPL Browser...........................................................................................157
6.2.1 Opening Browser............................................................................159
6.2.2 Browser Window ............................................................................159
6.2.3 Compiling CAPL Programs.............................................................159
6.2.4 Searching for Run-Time Errors.......................................................160
6.2.5 Access to the Database .................................................................160
6.2.6 Importing and Exporting ASCII Files...............................................161
6.2.7 Browser Options.............................................................................161

7 Option .CAN .....................................................................................................162

7.1 The Trace Window of Option .CAN ...........................................................162


7.2 The Bus Statistics Window of Option .CAN ...............................................163

8 Option .LIN .......................................................................................................164

8.1 Configuration of a LIN Test Environment...................................................164


8.2 LIN Scheduler ...........................................................................................164
8.3 LIN Simulator ............................................................................................164
8.4 LIN Specifications......................................................................................165
8.5 The Converter Tool LDF to DBC................................................................165
8.6 Trace Window for Option .LIN ...................................................................165
8.7 The Bus Statistics Window for Option .LIN................................................166

9 Option .MOST...................................................................................................167

9.1 Installation Procedure................................................................................167


9.1.1 Prerequisites ..................................................................................167
9.1.2 Procedure.......................................................................................167
9.2 Profile ........................................................................................................168
9.3 Timestamps...............................................................................................168

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


XII

9.4 Synchronized timestamp ...........................................................................168


9.5 Original timestamp ....................................................................................169
9.6 Time Synchronization Accuracy ................................................................169
9.7 Database Support .....................................................................................169
9.7.1 Function Catalogs in XML ..............................................................170
9.7.1.1 Using XML Function Catalogs in CANoe/DENoe .............170
9.7.1.2 Setting disassembly mode ...............................................170
9.7.1.3 Validation .........................................................................170
9.7.1.4 Import Errors and Warnings .............................................171
9.7.1.5 Using more than one XML Function Catalog ...................171
9.7.1.6 Reading and Rereading XML files....................................171
9.7.2 CANdb++ .......................................................................................172
9.7.3 CAPL .........................................................................................172
9.7.4 Frame .........................................................................................172
9.7.4.1 Lookup Key ......................................................................173
9.7.4.2 Message Name................................................................173
9.7.4.3 Message Attributes ..........................................................173
9.7.4.4 Parameters ......................................................................173
9.7.5 HW Configuration ...........................................................................174
9.8 Interactive Generator Block MOST ...........................................................175
9.9 Trace Window ...........................................................................................175
9.10 Busstatistic Window ..................................................................................177
9.11 Graphic- & Data Window...........................................................................177
9.12 CAPL.........................................................................................................177
9.12.1 Initialization of Message Variables .................................................177
9.12.2 Selectors ........................................................................................178
9.12.3 Event Procedures...........................................................................179
9.12.3.1 on mostMessage..............................................................179
9.12.3.2 on mostRawMessage ......................................................180
9.12.3.3 on mostLightLockError.....................................................180
9.12.4 Functions........................................................................................180
9.12.4.1 MostGetFBlockID, MostGetFunctionID,
MostGetOpType...............................................................180
9.12.4.2 MostSetFBlockID, MostSetFunctionID,
MostSetOpType ...............................................................180
9.12.5 Hardware API .................................................................................181
9.12.5.1 Optolyzer Operation Mode...............................................181
9.12.5.2 Node Mode ......................................................................181

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


XIII

9.12.5.3 Spy Filter..........................................................................182


9.12.6 Error Codes of CAPL functions ......................................................183
9.12.6.1 kMostTxQueueFull = -6....................................................183
9.12.6.2 kMostWrongOptoMode = -5.............................................183
9.12.6.3 kMostWrongThread = -4 ..................................................183
9.12.6.4 kMostIllegalTime = -3.......................................................184
9.12.6.5 kMostNoConnection = -2 .................................................184
9.12.6.6 kMostInvalidChannel = -1 ................................................184
9.12.6.7 kErrDrvOK = 0 .................................................................184
9.13 Demo Configurations CANoe/DENoe........................................................184
9.13.1 MOSTSpy.......................................................................................184
9.13.2 MOSTGeneral ................................................................................184
9.13.3 MOST XML Catalog .......................................................................185
9.14 Known Problems & Trouble Shooting........................................................185
9.14.1 Measurement Windows frequently disabled...................................185
9.14.2 CANoe doesn’t receive any MOST Frames ...................................185
9.14.3 CANoe doesn’t receive some MOST Frames.................................185
9.14.4 Warning ‘2 Tx receipt(s) got lost’ ....................................................186
9.14.5 After several minutes CANoe doesn’t receive or send any
MOST Frames................................................................................186
9.14.6 Error ‘Port COM1 busy for channel 1’.............................................186
9.14.7 Error ‘No valid license for channel 1’ ..............................................186
9.14.8 Weird Spurious Events from MOST bus .........................................187
9.14.9 Transmit Acknowledgement ...........................................................187
9.14.10 Timestamps of CAN and MOST constantly drift apart ................187
9.14.11 Measurement stops after configuration of trace window ............187
9.15 XML Engine...............................................................................................188

10 Option .FlexRay ...............................................................................................189

10.1 Trace Window for Option .FlexRay............................................................189


10.2 The Bus Statistics Window for Option .FlexRay ........................................190

11 Index ............................................................................................................191

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


1

1 Introduction
In this chapter, you get an overview about the purpose and functionality of CANoe.
A short tutorial leads you through the essential components of CANoe and roughly
acquaints you with the individual functions.

1.1 Overview
CANoe is a universal development, test and analysis environment for CAN bus sys-
tems, which is made available to all project participants over the entire development
process. The system producer is supported in functional distribution, functional
checking and integration of the overall system. The supplier obtains an ideal test en-
vironment by simulation of the remainder of the bus and environment.
The development process is based on a phase model which differentiates between
three development stages (see Figure 1).

Phase 1: Requirements analysis and design of the networked system


First, the party responsible for design distributes the overall functionality of the
system among different network nodes and refines the design to the level of the
network node. This includes defining messages and selecting the baud rate of
the bus. Finally the bus behavior of individual network nodes must be specified,
e. g. in the form of cycle times or more complex protocols. Then this information
can be evaluated first by the simulation tool to provide initial estimates of bus
load and the latency times to be expected at the prescribed baud rate. After-
wards, this specification can also be utilized for testing in subsequent phases.
For a more accurate study, a dynamic functional model of the overall system is
created. This involves specifying the behavior of the network nodes with regard
to input and output variables and the messages to be received and transmitted.
Especially useful here is an event-driven model with a procedural description of
behavior. For example, the model may describe how - after receiving a mes-
sage (Event) - the received data are to be further processed (procedural) and
how the result is to be output as a control variable.
The user must also specify the input variables to the simulation tool, so that the
time behavior of network nodes and the accumulation of messages can be
simulated. The results of the simulation serve to validate the design and can
later be used as a reference after implementation.

Phase 2: Implementation of components with simulation of remainder of the bus


After the first phase has been completed the design and development of indi-
vidual network nodes is usually performed by all participants, independently and
in parallel. The models for the other network nodes can now be used to simulate
the remainder of the bus for testing of a developed network node. The tool re-
quires an interface to the real bus for this, and it must be able to conduct the
simulation in real time.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


2

Figure 1 : Phase model of the development process

Phase 3: Integration of the overall system


In this last development phase all real network nodes are connected to the bus
in a step-by-step manner. To accomplish this it must be possible to "disconnect"
the models one-by-one in the simulation of the remainder of the bus. The tool
serves increasingly as an intelligent analysis tool which observes the message
traffic between the real network nodes on the bus and compares the results with
the specified requirements.
The behavior of network nodes with regard to input and output signals is described
with the help of environment variables. CANoe differentiates between discrete and
continuous variables. Switch positions can be represented as discrete environment
variables. With continuous environment variables, dimensions such as temperature
or engine RPM can be described.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


3

The control panels provide a user-friendly interface to the environment variables. The
user can create the panels independently with the help of the Panel Editor. During the
simulation values of environment variables can be displayed (lamps, counters) and
interactively modified (switches, potentiometers).
The example in Figure 2 is intended to clarify the functions which CANoe provides for
simulation and testing of CAN bus systems.
By pressing the pushbutton on the left control panel the discrete environment variable
"Pushbutton" is set to the value 1. The bus node on the left reacts by sending out a
message on the CAN bus. The bus node in the middle receives this message and
sets the discrete environment variable "Light" to 1. This causes the small lamp in the
middle control panel to light up.

Figure 2: Components of the simulation system

Analogously, the user can also adjust the potentiometer in the middle control panel,
whereby the value of the continuous environment variable "Potentiometer" is modi-
fied. This causes the middle network node to place a message on the bus with the
new data. This message is received by the network node on the right. There a new
value is calculated from the signal contents for the environment variable "Engine
RPM". Finally, this causes the display of engine speed to be updated on the right
control panel.
The behavior presented in the previous sections can be described very easily with
functions available in CAPL. By this method it is possible to implement a simulation of
complex systems with relatively little effort.

1.2 Tips for Using CANoe


The basic operating procedures for using CANoe are explained in this section. If you
are working with Windows for the first time, you should first become familiar with the
basics of operating Windows applications. To do this, select the Windows tutorial
program under the Help menu in the Windows Program Manager.
Essentially, CANoe can be operated by both mouse and keyboard. For example, you
can select a main menu by clicking it with the left mouse button. Then you can click

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


4

again on an item in the submenu which appears, and the associated action is exe-
cuted.
As an alternative, the main menu can be activated by pressing the <Alt> key. You can
now select an item with the cursor keys (<Arrow right>, <Arrow left>, <Arrow up> and
<Arrow down> and execute the associated action by pressing the Enter key.
You can deactivate a selected menu entry again by pressing <ESC> or by clicking
outside of the menu area with the mouse button.
All of the windows described above can be moved, enlarged, reduced, opened and
closed again at any time, i.e. also during the measurement. To move the window
simply drag (= press the left mouse key and hold it down while the mouse is moved)
the title bar of the particular window to the new position. To change the window size,
drag on the sides or corners of the window.
As an alternative you can also perform these actions with the keyboard after calling
the system menu (pressing <Alt>-<SPACE> or <Alt>-<->). See the Windows manuals
or Windows online Help for further details.

1.2.1 Menus
CANoe is operated using the main menu. The individual menu commands are de-
scribed in detail in online Help
Additionally, there are other context-sensitive menus in the evaluation windows de-
scribed above and in the data flow plans in the simulation and measurement setup
windows. These menus allow the user to specifically configure certain objects. These
menus can be opened by clicking the active block in the active window or in the
measurement setup window with the right mouse button. Using the keyboard this is
done by pressing <F10>.
Most blocks in the measurement and simulation setups can be parameterized by se-
lecting the first item in the context menu Configuration. The block's configuration
dialog is opened for this purpose. You can also start this dialog directly, without going
through the context menu, by double clicking on the active block or pressing the En-
ter key.

1.2.2 Dialogs
In addition to command inputs, which are usually made using menus, there are also
parameter inputs. As a rule, parameters are entered in dialog boxes. A dialog box
generally consists of six types of fields, each of which can occur more than once:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


5

Test input box (type-bound)

Control box/Check box

Comment box

Button Options button/Radio button

Figure 3: Box Types in Dialogs

Comment box This tells the user what is to be input. The boxes behave passively
when clicking on them with the mouse. They cannot be accessed
by keyboard either.
Text input box Alphanumeric boxfield, e.g. for entering file names. Numeric box-
(type-bound) field, e.g. for entering integer or floating point numbers.
Drop-down list After clicking on the arrow along the right border of the box, a list
drops down, from which you can select a value from a prescribed
set of values.
Options but- These buttons represent mutually exclusive options. You can only
ton/Radio button select one option at a time. If you select another option, the previ-
ous selection becomes inactive. The currently selected option but-
ton is identified by a black dot.
Control A check box next to an option indicates that this option can be acti-
box/Check box vated or deactivated. In this case you can activate as many check
boxes as desired. Activated check boxes are identified by an "x" or
„ “.
Button Buttons serve to execute certain actions, e.g. to exit the dialog box
or to open a subordinate dialog box.

All dialogs have action buttons labeled [OK], [Cancel] and [Help]. If you press [OK],
the settings you have made in the dialog are accepted into the configuration of the
particular block. If you press [Cancel], all settings made since the dialog box was last
opened will be lost. With the [Help] button you can obtain a help text about the dialog
box you are currently working with. After the Help window has been closed you can
continue with the dialog. All settings are preserved.
Most CANoe dialogs also have an [Options] button. When this button is activated
another dialog appears with which you can modify the CANoe global options (deci-
mal/hexadecimal number representation, symbolic/numeric mode).

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


6

Note: Modification of the global options from a configuration dialog affects data
representation in all system windows and dialogs.

Where there are multiple input and action boxes in a dialog box, first the desired box
must be selected. Using the mouse this is done by clicking on the appropriate box.
For input boxes this causes the text cursor to be placed at the mouse pointer position
in the box. Check boxes change their state, and for action boxes the action is exe-
cuted. With keyboard operation the particular box is selected with <Tab> or <Shift-
Tab>. Check boxes can be then be toggled using the spacebar. The <Enter> key
closes the dialog box and executes any actions selected in action boxes.

1.2.3 Measurement and Simulation Setup


CANoe is primarily configured in the measurement setup and simulation setup win-
dows, in which the program's data flow plans are displayed.

Figure 4: Measurement Setup and Simulation Setup of CANoe

Mouse Operation
All blocks and some images in the measurement setup and simulation windows
are mouse sensitive. When selected by clicking the left mouse button, the ele-
ment preselected in this manner is identified by a frame as the Active Element.
When the right mouse button is clicked, a popup menu appears in which the ob-
ject is configured by the methods described above. As an alternative, the con-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


7

figuration dialog for the active block can be called directly by double clicking
with the left mouse button.

Keyboard Operation
When the measurement setup or simulation setup is active and <Tab>, <Back-
space> or one of the cursor keys is activated, the preselect frame around the
currently active element is indexed forward. <Tab> results in forward indexing
(<Backspace>: Reverse indexing) of the internal processing sequence. The
cursor keys index forward to the next closest element geometrically in the direc-
tion of the arrow. When <F10> is activated the popup menu of the active ele-
ment appears. As an alternative, the Enter key can be used to call the configu-
ration dialog of the active block directly.
You can deactivate the preselected function block in the measurement setup
and simulation setup with the spacebar, or reactivate it by pressing the space-
bar again.
With <Ctrl-F6> and <Ctrl-Shift-F6> you can bring any opened CANoe window to
the foreground and activate it.

1.2.4 Online Help


Selecting the main menu item [Help] opens a Help contents window, which contains
basic information and references to other Help pages. You can select references by
clicking with the mouse or indexing through them with <TAB> and then pressing the
Enter key.
The CAPL Browser, the CANdb++ Editor, the Panel Editor, the Panel Generator and
the CAPL Generator each have their own Help system with another main [Help]
menu. Activate this from the particular program.
Activating the <F1> key causes a Help topic to appear for the element that is active
or preselected at the time the key is pressed. This context-sensitive Help function is
provided for all dialogs, all program window panes and for all menu items, both in the
main menu and in popup menus.

1.3 CANoe Tour


If you are starting up CANoe for the first time, and its functionality and controls are
still completely new to you, the following tour will help you to become familiar with its
operating concept and its most important features.
For this tour you will first set up a very simple CAN bus where CANoe assumes the
roles of both sender and receiver. In the first step CANoe is configured as a data
source, i.e. as a transmitting station. You will then learn about of CANoe's analysis
options by studying the generated data in the measurement windows afterwards.
In complex real systems CANoe typically also assumes both roles. You can utilize the
program as a data source to transmit data to other controllers, but you can simulta-
neously use it to observe, log and evaluate the data traffic on the CAN bus.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


8

In the last part of the tour you will become familiar with the CAPL programming lan-
guage and create two network nodes of a distributed system to solve a simple simu-
lation task in CANoe.

1.3.1 Preparations
To start CANoe, call CANOE32.EXE by double clicking the appropriate icon in the
CANoe program group.
CANoe has various evaluation windows (Trace, Data, Graphics, Statistics and Bus
Statistics windows) as well as a measurement setup window and a simulation setup
window which show you the data flow and simultaneously allow you to configure CA-
Noe.
You can access all program windows from the [View] menu on the main menu bar.

Figure 5: View Menu on Main Menu Bar

In the simulation setup window the overall system is shown graphically with the CAN
bus and all network nodes. The simulated bus is represented by a red horizontal line.
The black line beneath it symbolizes the real bus. The two buses are connected to
one another via the PC-card.. To transmit data from CANoe onto the bus, insert
transmit blocks in the simulation setup, which must be connected by the red line.
The data flow diagram of the CANoe measurement setup has a connection to the
simulation setup on the left - symbolized by the >> symbol - and various evaluation
blocks on the right serving as data sinks. That is, the data flow is from left to right.
Connection lines and branches are drawn between the individual elements to clarify
the data flow.
The information arriving at each evaluation block are displayed in the block's evalua-
tion window. For example, the Trace window displays all information arriving at the
trace block, while the Graphics window shows you information arriving at the graph-
ics block.
The only exception is the logging block, which is not assigned a window but rather a
file in which the data arriving at the block are logged.
In the data flow diagram you will also recognize small black rectangles: . At these
insertion points (Hotspots) you can insert additional function blocks for manipulating
the data flow (Filter, replay and generator blocks, or CAPL program blocks with user-
definable functions).

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


9

Make sure that you begin this tour with a new configuration by selecting the menu
item File│New configuration. The Simulation Setup wizard starts, which we don not
need for this tour. Therefore you have to exit the wizard by selecting the [Cancel]
button.

Figure 6: Menu Item File|New configuration

1.3.2 Setting Up the CAN Bus


To start up CANoe it is advisable to use a test setup with only two network nodes that
is independent of existing CAN bus systems. The two CAN controllers on the sup-
plied PC-card can serve as the network nodes.
First, connect the two D-Sub-9 connectors of your CAN card to one another. A con-
nection cable with two bus termination resistors of 120Ω each for the high-speed bus
interface is provided with the CANoe product. For a low-speed interface you will sim-
ply need a 3-conductor cable to interconnect the pins of the two controllers that are
assigned to the bus lines CAN-High, CAN-Low and Ground.

CAN bus
cable PC-Board

Figure 7: PC-Card with Connection Cable

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


10

Consequently, the CAN bus that you use during this tour will consist of a short 2-
conductor or 3-conductor cable that connects the two CAN controllers of the CAN
card to one another. This is necessary as a minimal configuration, since the CAN pro-
tocol requires - in addition to a sender - at least one receiver that confirms the correct
receipt of messages with an acknowledge.
Up to this point we have not considered definitions of bus parameters (Transmission
speed, sampling point, etc.) which must be set for each of the two participating con-
trollers. To do this, from the View menu bring the simulation setup to the foreground
and click the right mouse button on the square that represents the bus system.

Figure 8: Popup Menu of the bus symbol

Please select Channel configuration… from the popup menu.

Figure 9: Configuration of Bus Parameters and Direct Baud Rate Selection

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


11

After then select + and Setup from the configuration dialog for the first controller CAN
1 and type in the value for the baudrate 100kBaud.This makes sense for both high-
speed and low-speed buses. After you activate the [Update] button, CANoe recom-
mends default values for the controller registers, which you accept with [OK]. When
you do this - besides the transmission speed of 100 kBaud - you also implicitly define
other controller parameters (Sampling point, BTL cycles, and synchronization jump
width). For the overall system to function properly, the same exact values must be
assumed for the second controller CAN2. When you exit the dialog, CANoe asks you
whether the parameters should be accepted. Answer with YES.

1.3.3 Transmitting Data


Since your current test setup still does not have a data source, your first task is to set
up a data source in CANoe which places information on the bus cyclically.

Unit 1: Configure CANoe so that - after the measurement start - a CAN message
with identifier 64 (hex) is placed on the bus every 100 milliseconds. In this
case the message should contain exactly four data bytes with the values
D8 (hex), D6 (hex), 37 (hex) and 0.

You can solve this task by inserting a generator block in CANoe's simulation setup
which generates the message to be transmitted. This is done by clicking with the right
mouse button on the bus lines in the simulation setup, and - from the popup menu -
inserting a generator block on the bus.

Figure 10: Bus Symbol in Simulation Setup with Popup Menu

Afterwards, this appears in the simulation setup as a rectangular block that is con-
nected to the simulated bus (red line). You can then configure this block from its
popup menu, which you access by pressing the right mouse button.
First, fill out the transmit list. You enter 64 as the identifier. (Check to see whether the
numbering format is set to [Hex] using the [Options] button .) Then enter the value 4
in the DLC box as the data length entry. Finally, set the values of the data bytes in the
four data boxes that follow by entering the values D8, D6, 37 and 0 there.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


12

Figure 11: Transmit List of Generator Block

Exit the transmit list with [OK] to accept the values in the configuration. In the gen-
erator block's popup menu, you must now still configure triggering for the transmit
action. On the second line check the box With Period and then enter the value 100
in the input box to the right of this.

Figure 12: Triggering of Generator Block

These values are assumed into the configuration with [OK].


Before you start the measurement you should save the configuration that you have
prepared to this point with the menu command File│Save configuration. You can
then reload this configuration at any time and resume your work precisely at this
point.
Furthermore, CANoe requires that you associate a database to the configuration be-
fore the start of measurement. Therefore, you should initially assign the database
MOTBUS.DBC from the demo directory DEMO_CAN_CN\AUTOMOT\CANDB to your ac-
tive CANoe configuration. The concrete benefits of this database will be made clear
in the sections that follow.
You can use the simulation setup to edit databases (add, assign, delete, etc.). In the
system view window of the simulation setup, you can see a tree representation of the
current configuration. If you go to Databases with the mouse pointer and click with
the right mouse button, you will bring up the Add… command in the context menu.
You can use this command to add an (additional) database to the current bus.
After you have brought up the command, the Open window appears and you can
select a database.
If you click on the [OK] button, the new database is accepted for the current bus and
displayed in the system view window.
Start the measurement by pressing the start button on the toolbar. CANoe immedi-
ately begins to cyclically transmit the message you have configured in the generator
block. You can recognize this in the Trace window, which automatically jumps to the
foreground after the start of measurement and can now be seen at the lower right of
the main program window: In the first line you see the message that is sent by the

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


13

generator block, whereby the first column shows the transmit time relative to the
measurement start.

Figure 13: Trace Window

The next column shows you which of the two CAN channels was used to transmit.
This value (1) agrees with the default value assigned in the generator block's transmit
list of messages to be transmitted.
Afterwards, this message is also received by the second CAN controller over the bus.
The question arises: Why is this not also displayed in the Trace window? You will find
the answer in the configuration dialog for the acceptance filter for the second control-
ler. In turn, you can open this dialog from the PC-card icon's popup menu under the
entry Channel configuration…/CAN 2/Filter.

Figure 14: Popup Menu of the bus symbol

The acceptance filter options support hardware-side filtering of messages. The de-
fault options block most message receiving. You can open the filter by entering the
value X in the upper line.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


14

Figure 15: Configuration of Acceptance filter

After a new measurement start you can now also see that the message transmitted
via channel 1 (Transmit attribute Tx [= Transmit] in the Trace window) was received
by the second controller (Receive attribute Rx [= Receive] in the Trace window).

Figure 16: Result in the Trace Window

We will now expand the task and additionally transmit a message with modified data:

Unit 2: Expand the configuration of the last task such that, additionally, a message
with identifier 3FC (hex) is transmitted every 200 milliseconds. The value
of the first data byte of this message should cyclically assume values from
1 to 5.

You can solve this task by inserting another generator block in the simulation setup.
Select 200 ms as the value for cyclic triggering. The transmit list should appear as
shown below:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


15

Figure 17: Transmit List for Generator Block

Do not forget to stop the measurement before you reconfigure the simulation setup.
During a running measurement it is not possible to make changes to the configura-
tion of the data flow. The menu items of the relevant popup menus appear in gray
shading.
Besides the generator block, CANoe also offers two additional block types as data
sources. With a replay block you can play back data on the bus that were logged with
CANoe's logging function. A program block allows you to integrate your own transmit
functionalities - which may be quite complex - into CANoe with the CAPL program-
ming language.

1.3.4 Evaluation Windows


Evaluation windows are used to analyze data generated by the generator blocks in
the simulation setup.
You have already learned about the Trace window. Data that reach the trace block of
the measurement setup are displayed here as CAN messages in bus-oriented for-
mat. Besides the time stamp, this includes the number of the CAN controller, the i-
dentifier, an attribute for differentiating transmitted and received messages, and the
data bytes of the CAN message. You can configure the Trace window - like all other
analysis windows - from the popup menu that is accessed by clicking the right mouse
button on the window or on the appropriate block.
Furthermore, the four buttons on the right of the toolbar can be used to configure the
Trace window. For example, with you can toggle from "stationary" mode to the
scroll mode, in which each message arriving at the trace block is written to a new
line.

With you can toggle between absolute and relative time representation. In rela-
tive time representation, the time difference between two successive messages
("transmit interval") is shown in the first column. Of course, in this display format it is
also easy to find the transmit interval that you entered previously in the generator
block: 100 milliseconds.
The Statistics window also offers you bus-related information. Here you can observe
the transmit frequencies for messages, coded by identifiers. If you have configured
the simulation setup as in the two last tasks, then you should see two vertical lines in
the Statistics window after the measurement start, which show the transmit frequen-
cies of the two generated messages 64 (hex) and 3FC (hex).

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


16

Figure 18: Statistics Window

10 messages per second were recorded for identifier 64, and half as many were re-
corded for identifier 3FC. This result corresponds to the cyclic periods of 100 and 200
milliseconds set in the generator blocks.
If the Graphics window display is too imprecise, the statistics block offers you a sta-
tistical report that gives you more precise information on the transmit interval for each
message. Stop the measurement and activate the statistical report in the configura-
tion dialog of the Statistics block (Measurement Setup).

Figure 19: Activate the statistical report

If the Activate check box of the expanded statistical functions is selected, a Statistics
report is generated for at least one acquisition range during the measurement. After
the end of the measurement this can be output to the Write window by the Display
statistics report command in the Statistics block's popup menu.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


17

Figure 20: Statistics Report

Besides showing the total number of messages for each identifier, the statistics report
also shows the mean value, standard deviation, and minimum and maximum for the
recorded transmit interval.
Another bus-related window, the Bus Statistics window, provides an overview of bus
data traffic. Displayed here are the total frequencies of data, remote, error and over-
load frames, bus loading and CAN controller status. Since in our case one message
is sent every 100 ms and the second message every 200ms, the total frequency of all
messages is 15 frames per second. With an average data length of about 70 bits per
frame, approx. 15 * 70 ≈ 1000 bits are placed on the bus in one second. At a baud
rate of 100 kBit/sec the bus load in our example would be on the order of magnitude
of one percent.

Figure 21: Bus Statistics Window

1.3.5 Working with Symbolic Data


Before we discuss the remaining windows in detail, let us have a look at the capabili-
ties offered by CANoe for the symbolic description of data. Of primary interest in the

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


18

analysis of CAN systems - besides bus-related information such as messages, error


frames and message frequencies - is information on useful data, i.e. signals such as
RPM, temperature and engine load, which are provided by individual controllers, and
are sent on the bus with the help of CAN messages.
To describe this information symbolically, CANoe provides you with the database
format DBC and a database editor with which you can read, create and modify CAN
databases. Please refer to the CANdb++ manual and the CANdb++ online help in-
cluded with the CANoe product for further information on the CANdb++ editor.
At this point we would like to use the database MOTBUS.DBC, which you have already
associated to the active CANoe configuration. This database will be used to interpret
the data bytes of the messages generated by the generator blocks in the transmit
branch. To do this, first open the database using the button on the toolbar. The
CANdb++ Editor is opened, and the contents of the database MOTBUS.DBC are
shown in the Overall View window of the CANdb++ Editor.

Figure 22: Overall View Window of the CANdb++ Editor

Double click the Messages object type in the area on the left side of the Overall View
window. The subordinate structural level is then also shown in this area, and the area
on the right shows the available messages with their system parameters (e.g. sym-
bolic name, identifier, etc.). First, toggle the numbering format from decimal to hexa-
decimal in the Options│Settings menu item. We can deduce from the symbolic
names of the messages that the system under consideration involves a description of
communications in a rudimentary engine area system.
Click the message EngineData in the left area of the overall view window. The system
parameters of signals transmitted in this message are shown in the area on the right
side of the Overall View window.
The temperature EngTemp, for example, is a 7 bit signal. To obtain the physical value
in degrees Celsius, the bit value must be multiplied by the factor 2, and the offset 50

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


19

must be subtracted from the result. The idle switch signal Idle Running in the last bit
of the third data byte is a binary signal (one bit), which can assume the value 0 or 1.
With the help of this symbolic information the data contents of messages can now be
interpreted in CANoe. Please note that this only makes sense if the database infor-
mation describes the system that you are currently observing. Of course, you can
also associate a different database to CANoe. The observed CAN data traffic is then
interpreted according to the information in that database, even if it does not make any
sense. You yourself are responsible for ensuring that the database associated to the
configuration matches the real CAN network.
Messages that you generate in the two generator blocks can be interpreted with the
database MOTBUS.DBC. Please note that the message you generated in the first task
has the identifier 64 (hex). This agrees with the identifier of the message EngineData
that we just examined in the database editor. If you now start the measurement, you
can toggle the program to symbolic mode by activating the button.
In the Trace window you will now see the symbolic message name in addition to the
identifier.

Figure 23: Trace Window

1.3.6 Analysis of Signal Values in the Data Window


Besides the use of symbolic message names, the associated database can also be
used to analyze signal values. The purpose of the Data window is to assist in the
study of momentary signal values.
This explains why the Data window is initially empty in a new configuration. The sig-
nal vlaues to be displayed are exclusively dependent upon information from the data-
base. You as the user must decide which signal values should be displayed.

Unit 3: Configure the Data window to display the signal values of the message
EngineData (ID 64 hex) that is generated in the transmit branch.

To solve this task, first open the Data window's popup menu and then start the con-
figuration dialog. Initially, the signal list in this dialog is still empty. With the [New
Signal] button you start the Signal Explorer, which makes it possible for you to select

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


20

a signal from the database. The object hierarchy on the left side of the dialog allows
you to search for a specific signal. On the right side are the signals of the selected
object.
To configure the Data window, first select EngineData from the list of all messages.

Figure 24: Selecting Signals with the Signal Explorer

Afterwards, select and accept all signals of this message from the dialog list on the
right.
When you close the Data window's configuration dialog you will see that the signal
names are now entered in the window. After the measurement start the generator
block begins to cyclically send the message EngineData with data bytes D8, D6, 37
and 0 onto the bus. According to the message description in the database, the data
block in the measurement setup now interprets these byte values as engine speed,
temperature and idle switch and displays the appropriate signal values in the Data
window in physical units.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


21

Figure 25: Data Window

With the help of the conversion formula in the database, engine speed is shown in
RPM, while temperature is shown in degrees Celsius. The values of all three signals
remain constant over time, since the message is constantly transmitted with the
same data bytes D8, D6, 37 and 0.

1.3.7 Analysis of Signal Responses in the Graphics Window


While the Data window displays momentary signal values, you can have the time re-
sponses of signal values displayed in the Graphics window. After the end of meas-
urement the signal responses are available for study by user-friendly analysis func-
tions.

Unit 4: Configure the Graphics window so that signal values are displayed for
message 3FC (hex) that is generated in the transmit branch.

The second message generated in the transmit branch is also described in the asso-
ciated database. In the database it will be apparent to you that the identifier 3FC is
associated with the symbolic message name GearBoxInfo containing the signals
Gear, ShiftRequest and EcoMode.
You can now observe the time responses of these signals in the Graphics window.
The Graphics window can be configured exactly like the Data window. Here too you
open the configuration dialog for signals from the window's popup menu. In the signal
selection dialog you select the 3 signals of the message GearBoxInfo. In the Graph-
ics window you see that the signals are now entered in the legend on the left side of
the window. After the measurement start you observe that the signal Gear cyclically
assumes values from 1 to 5, while the other two signals remain constant over time.

Figure 26: Graphics Window

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


22

This corresponds to the five values that you entered in the generator block as part of
task 2. The values remain in the Graphics window after the end of the measurement.
The measurement functions that the window provides for post-analysis are described
in section 3.4.5.

1.3.8 Use of the Database in Transmitting Messages


Until now you have only used the symbolic database to observe signal values. How-
ever, the application capabilities reach well beyond this. For example, open the
transmit list of the generator block of task 1. Instead of the identifier that you previ-
ously entered in the transmit list (64), you will now recognize the associated symbolic
name in the first column. In fact, you can now enter a message directly from the da-
tabase using the [Symbol...] button, without having to work with the identifier.
Signal values can also be edited directly in the transmit list now. Select the first line of
the transmit list and then activate the [Signal...] button. In the values dialog you can
now enter the signal values directly. It will also be apparent to you, once again, that
the byte values D8, D6, 37 and 0 from the first line correspond to the signal values
EngSpeed = 55000 rpm, EngTemp = 60 degrees Celsius and IdleRunnning = 0.

Figure 27: Values Dialog in the Generator Block

If you now set - for example - the value of EngSpeed to 1000 rpm, the generator
block automatically uses the database information to compute the corresponding
data bytes (10, 27, 37 and 0).

1.3.9 Logging a Measurement


CANoe has extensive logging functions for data logging. In the standard measure-
ment setup the logging branch is shown at the very bottom of the screen. You can
easily recognize it by the file icon that symbolizes the log file. The log file is filled
with CAN data during the measurement.

Unit 5: Log - in ASCII format - all CAN data traffic that is generated in a short
measurement (approx. 20 sec.) by the generator blocks in the simulation
setup.

To log the data that arrive in CANoe's measurement setup to a file, first activate the
logging branch. Also remove the break that separates the logging block of a new con-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


23

figuration from the data source. You can do this by double clicking the break symbol
or with the popup menu of the break (hot spot). From the popup menu of the file icon
located at the far right of the logging branch, open the configuration dialog. Here you
can enter the file name for the measurement log as well as its format. Select ASCII
format here.

Figure 28: Configuration Dialog in the Logging Branch

Logs in binary format take up less space on your hard drive, but they cannot be read
by normal text editors. The program's Offline mode offers you the same evaluation
options for logs in both formats.
Besides the file icon, you can also specify trigger conditions for file logging in the log-
ging block. This is often advisable, since frequently it is not the data traffic on the can
bus over the entire measurement period that is of interest, but rather only certain time
intervals, e.g. when there are implausible signal values or when error frames occur.
A description of how to define trigger conditions and time windows around these con-
ditions is presented in section 2.7.1.1. To log the entire measurement it is sufficient to
change the mode from Single Trigger to Entire Measurement in the trigger configu-
ration dialog.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


24

Exit the dialog with [OK] and then start the measurement, which you stop again after
20 seconds. Now with a double click on the log file icon you can open the logged
ASCII file. Besides the logged messages you can see that statistical information was
also logged. These lines correspond exactly to the information that is displayed in the
Bus Statistics window during a measurement.

1.3.10 Evaluating a Log File


Log files in ASCII format can indeed be viewed with text editors, but often it is more
sensible to utilize the capabilities that CANoe provides for offline analysis of log files.

Unit 6: Play back the log file recorded for the last task in Offline mode, and ob-
serve the signal response in the Graphics window.

To solve this task, first switch CANoe to Offline mode. In the main Mode menu you
will find two entries for this: To Offline and To Offline (Copy). Since you can use the
Graphics window configuration you prepared in Online mode here too, it is advisable
to copy all configuration options of the analysis branch to Offline mode with To
Offline (Copy).
Now shown as the data source in the measurement setup - instead of the bus symbol
- is a file icon. Otherwise, all of measurement setup options of Online mode have
been assumed. You can configure the data source by double clicking the file icon at
the left of the measurement setup and entering the name of the log file selected in
the last task.
Also you have to separate the logging block. You can do this by double clicking the
hot spot symbol in front (left) of the Logging block or with the popup menu of this hot
spot.
You can now play back the measurement with the F9 key. In contrast to Online mode,
here CANoe also offers you the option of replaying the measurement in slow motion
(Start│Animate menu item or F8 key) or in Single-Step mode (Start│Step menu
item or F7 key).
The same analysis functions are available to you in Offline mode as in Online mode.
That is, the logged data are displayed in bus-related format in the Trace window,
while you can observe the log's signal responses in the Graphics window.
Of course, you can also insert filters or CAPL programs in the measurement setup to
further reduce the data or introduce additional user-defined analysis functions.

1.3.11 Creating a CAPL Program


Although CANoe provides you with a large number of transmit and analysis functions,
which you can parameterize in specific configuration dialogs, sooner or later you will
need to expand the functionality of CANoe with your own functions for your special
task requirements. This is why CANoe offers you the C-like programming language
CAPL.
In the next task you will create a simple CAPL program to count messages that are
generated in CANoe's simulation setup. You will find a complete description of the
programming language together with numerous detailed examples in the online help.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


25

Unit 7: Create a CAPL program with which you can count the number of mes-
sages of the type EngineData (ID 64 hex) and output the counted number
of messages to the Write window in response to a key press.

First, switch CANoe back to Online mode. In the simulation setup the generator block
which sends EngineData messages cyclically onto the bus should still be the data
source.
First you must decide where you wish to insert your CAPL program in the data flow
plan. In principle, any hotspot in the measurement setup or in the simulation setup is
available to you. However, since this program is solely for analysis purposes and
does not generate any messages itself, but only counts them, it is advisable to insert
the program on the right side of the measurement setup, perhaps before the Statis-
tics block. In the hotspot's popup menu choose the function Insert CAPL node. A
function block with the program symbol P now appears at the selected point in the
measurement setup. You can also access the node's configuration dialog via the
popup menu. First, select a program name, e.g. COUNTER.CAN, and then start the
CAPL Browser either from the configuration dialog's [Edit...] button or directly by
double clicking the program block in the measurement setup.
CAPL is an event-based programming language. Each CAPL program consists of
event procedures, with which you can react to external events (e.g. occurrence of
specific messages on the CAN bus or activation of keys on the PC keyboard). The
CAPL Browser is described in detail in the online help. With its sub-windows
("Panes") it allows you to create and edit CAPL programs quickly and easily.
In principle, you can also use your own text editor to create CAPL programs. CAPL
programs are normal ASCII files with the default name extension *.CAN, which must
be compiled before the start of measurement using the compiler provided with the
CANoe product.
For your program you will first need an integer variable which counts the messages.
For example, you could name it counter. Go to the upper right Browser pane and
enter this name in the variables block. The following should now appear in this pane:
variables {
int counter;
}
Like all global variables, this variable is automatically initialized to zero at the meas-
urement start.
In the next step, this variable should be incremented whenever an EngineData mes-
sage is registered. Therefore, you must expand the CAPL program to include an e-
vent procedure of the type on message ("React to message event"). To do this, click
the event type CAN Messages in the Browser tree using the right mouse button and
insert a new event procedure of this type using the command New from the popup
menu.
Now a procedure template appears in the Procedures Text Editor. First replace the
text <newMessage> by the symbolic name EngineData, which you could also as-
sume directly from the database via the popup menu item CANdb Message. During

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


26

compilation the CAPL compiler replaces the symbolic name by the corresponding
identifier 0x64.
Now you only need to define which actions should be performed when the event oc-
curs. Since the program is to count messages, the variable counter must be must
be incremented whenever a message is registered. The complete procedure appears
as follows:
on message EngineData
{
counter++;
}
As a last step, the output to the Write window must still be implemented. Finally, the
program should not just count messages, but also keep track of how many messages
have been counted.
The output to the Write window should occur when the ‘a’ key is pressed. Therefore,
you must define another event procedure for the event "Press key 'a'". In the Browser
tree you select the type Keyboard. This causes the previously defined on message
procedure to disappear, since it belongs to a different event type. Of course it still
remains a component of the CAPL program and will appear again as soon as you
select the Messages event type again.
Now insert a Keyboard event in the CAPL program from the popup menu. A new
procedure template will appear in the Procedures Text Editor, which you fill out as
follows:
on key 'a'
{
write("%d EngineData messages counted",counter);
}
The format entry %d refers to the integer variable counter, which is entered after
the comma. For the most part, this format string conforms to the C function
printf().
That completes the program. Save it and then start the compiler either with the F9
key, or the main menu command Compiler│Compile or by the lightning icon button
on the toolbar. If you have made an error in creating the program, a message window
will open showing you the error. Double click this error message to go to the location
where the error occurred. After you have corrected it and saved the program file
again, recompile the program. Once the program has compiled without errors, the
message Compiled appears in the status bar at the bottom of Browser's main win-
dow.
Now start the measurement. The generator block in the transmit branch begins to
cyclically transmit messages of the type EngineData, which are now counted by your
program. Whenever you press the 'a' key the text "n EngineData messages
counted" can be seen in the Write window, whereby n represents the number of
messages counted.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


27

1.3.12 Simulation of Distributed Systems in CANoe


CANoe provides environment variables to model the functional bus behavior of net-
work nodes. These environment variables are described by events and states of the
system environment (external pressure, temperature, switch positions, etc.). You can
observe and intentionally change these states - i.e. the values of the environment
variables - on user-definable control panels.
To work with environment variables in CAPL you use the event procedure type on
envVar (React to change in environment variable). The CAPL functions
getValue() and putValue() are used to read and write environment variables.
These language tools and symbolic access to the various variables defined in the
database make it possible to create simple prototypical network node models.
The following task consists of creating a complete CANoe configuration with two net-
work node models and associated periphery, i.e. control panels. This should only in-
volve implementation of distributed functions: After the user activates a switch, the
first node informs the second node of this action. The second node then activates an
indicator lamp in its periphery.

effect
evSwitch evLight

I/O Interface I/O Interface

Application Application

Bus Interface Bus Interface

Msg1.bsSwitch

This simplest functionality was purposely selected to direct the user's attention to the
creation of models and not to their functionality. More complex distributed systems
can build upon the same conceptual pattern in CANoe without any difficulty.
A model for distributed systems can be created efficiently in CANoe in three steps: :
1. Create the database with messages, signals and environment variables
2. Create the network node periphery, i.e. the control panels
3. Create the network node models in CAPL
To prepare for the task you might, for example, create a new empty configuration by
pressing the button on the toolbar.

1.3.12.1 Creating the Database


The first step involves creating a database which describes the following two signifi-
cant aspects of the system:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


28

• The exchange of information between the two network nodes via the communi-
cation medium, i.e. the CAN bus; and
• The I/O interface to the periphery, i.e. the "wiring" between each node and its
input and output units.
The database message and signal objects are available for describing the exchange
of information over the CAN bus. The simple functionality of the example can be
handled by a 1-bit signal which describes the state of the switch at the first node. This
signal is packed in a CAN message and is only transmitted if the switch state
changes (spontaneous transmission).
Therefore, you create a new database with the CANdb++ Editor, and in the database
you create a message, e.g. with the name Msg1 and identifier 100, which is to be
transmitted by the first node. Create the signal bsSwitch to describe the switch posi-
tion and link it to the message Msg1. In this case a signal length of one bit is suffi-
cient, since only two states need to be transmitted, On (1) and Off (0):
The database provides you with environment variables for describing the I/O inter-
face between the nodes and their peripheries. Each peripheral element (Switch, indi-
cator lamp, slider, etc.) is "wired" to an environment variable, i.e. it is connected to
the CAPL program for the network node.
In this example there are exactly two peripheral elements: A switch at the first node
and an indicator lamp at the second node. Therefore, two environment variables
must be created in the database, e.g. evLight and evSwitch:

Figure 29: Environment variables in the database

Save the database, e.g. under the name TOUR.DBC, and associate it with your empty
configuration. In the System View window of the Simulation setup you can add the
database. If you go in the tree view of the current configuration to Databases with the
mouse pointer and click on the right mouse button, you can run the command Add…
from the context menu.

1.3.12.2 Creating Panels


A separate application, the Panel Editor, is provided in CANoe for creating the node's
periphery. Please refer to chapter 5 for a detailed introduction to this editor.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


29

In the configuration under consideration, one panel must be created for each of the
two nodes. The first panel has a single control, a switch, while the second only has a
small lamp as an indicating element:

Switch Light

evSwitch evLight

Figure 30: Panels in CANoe

You can start the Panel Editor by activating the button on the CANoe toolbar. This
ensures that the database is available with environment variables evSwitch and
evLight which are necessary for the wiring.
In the Panel Editor first enter the name of the first node's panel under Options|Panel
Size, Name, Colors and Fonts, e.g. Panel 1. On the Panel Editor's toolbar choose a
switch and place it on the panel. You can wire the switch by double clicking and
then assigning the environment variable evSwitch to it. You can label the switch by
choosing the display element from the toolbar, placing it on the panel to the left of
the switch and then configuring it with a text, e.g. "Switch". You can change the size
of the panel by clicking the panel border and dragging it. Try not to size panels any
larger than necessary, since available screen space is usually a very limited and
hence valuable resource.
Save the panel, e.g. under the name SWITCH.CNP. Then create the panel for the
second node in the same way. Instead of a switch, here you should insert an indica-
tor lamp as a display element. To do this, choose the bitmap indicator from the
toolbar and then, by double clicking, configure the element as a display element with
2 states. In the configuration dialog you must also enter a bitmap to be used as the
indicator. Instead of creating a new bitmap, you might use, for example, the file
LAMP_2.BMP from CANoe's demo directory DEMO_CAN_CN\AUTOMOT\BITMAPS\-
BMP_2.
Before you save the panel, e.g. under the name LIGHT.CNP, you can also label the
indicator lamp by inserting and configuring static text to the left of it.
You complete this step of the task by integrating the created panels into the CANoe
configuration. To do this, open the panel configuration dialog and choose the menu
command Panel│Configure panels.
Add the two panel files SWITCH.CNP and LIGHT.CNP to the list of permanently
opened panels and open the panels by activating the button [Open All Panels]. Posi-
tion the panels on the screen according to your work requirements and save these
selected panel positions by the menu command Panel│Save panel positions.
Before creating the network node models, you should save the configuration you just
created by pressing the button on the toolbar.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


30

1.3.12.3 Creating Network Node Models


You create the network node models in the simulation setup. At the least, the model
for the first node must send a message when the switch is activated, and therefore it
may not be inserted in the measurement setup.
In the simulation setup click the bus lines to insert new network node models.

Figure 31: Inserting network nodes in the simulation setup

In this example you need two network nodes in the simulation setup: The first node
supplies the switch position, and the second reacts to this by activating or deactivat-
ing a small lamp.
You can access the configuration dialog for the two nodes again by pressing the right
mouse button. Here you enter the node name (e.g. ECU 1 or ECU 2) and assign a
file name to each of the two nodes (e.g. ECU1.CAN or ECU2.CAN). The node names
are shown in the node icons; the file names refer to CAPL programs which simulate
the functionalities of the two nodes. Double click on each node to open CAPL
Browser for the particular CAPL program.
The first CAPL program belongs to a node at whose periphery there is a switch.
When the switch position changes, the program acquires the new switch value and
immediately outputs it on the bus:
// Reaction to change of environment var. evSwitch
on envVar evSwitch {

// Declare a CAN message to be transmitted


message Msg1 msg;

// Read out the value of the light switch,


// Assign to the bus signal bsSwitch

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


31

msg.bsSwitch = getValue(this);

// Output message on bus (spontaneous transmission)


output(msg);
}
The second network node reacts to this message. The CAPL program reads the
value of the bus signal for the switch position and then activates or deactivates the
indicator lamp at its periphery. Please note that the switch value is only acquired via
the signal value on the bus. The value of the environment variable evSwitch is not
known to this CAPL program. That is, the communication between the two nodes oc-
curs exclusively via the CAN bus:
// Reaction to receipt of the CAN message M1
on message Msg1 {
// Read out a bus signal and
// set the environment variable
putValue(evLight, this.bsSwitch);
}
Now start the measurement in CANoe. Whenever you activate the switch on Panel 1
the indicator lamp illuminates. Whenever you turn the switch off, the indicator lamp
goes off. The Trace window shows you both the bus communication (Spontaneous
transmission of message Msg1 when the switch position changes) and the values of
environment variables evSwitch and evLight.
Please note how easily and directly this model of a simple distributed system can be
modeled in CAPL, and how the database assumes central importance.
You will find an introduction to CAPL programming and a detailed presentation of the
programming language in the online help.
The communication between two nodes via the CAN bus by means of spontaneous
emission, i.e. immediately sending out a CAN message in response to state changes,
is not the only capability for modeling the bus behavior of a network node. Cyclic
transmission protocols can also be implemented with CAPL language tools such as
timers.

1.3.13 Tips for Solving Your Own Tasks


This small tour should make you aware of the fundamental control concepts and
most important features of CANoe.
Remember that CANoe's measurement setup window and simulation setup represent
the data flow plans for your actual measurement or simulation task. Besides associat-
ing a database and configuring panels, you can configure all other options directly in
these windows: From the data source and bus symbol with network node models in
the simulation setup, to the evaluation blocks on the right side of the measurement
setup window. You can always access the popup menus of all objects in the meas-
urement and simulation setups by pressing the right mouse button.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


32

All data arriving at an evaluation block are - with the exception of the logging block -
displayed in the corresponding window. The evaluation windows can also be config-
ured by pressing the right mouse button. You can save all configuration settings in a
configuration file. Simply load such a prepared configuration file to prepare CANoe
for another measurement task.
If you are using CAPL for the first time, perhaps to write your own analysis functions
or to study the bus behavior of a controller, you will find a brief introduction to CAPL
in section 6.1.4.
In the CAPL manual you will find detailed explanations of the program's transmit and
analysis functions, which are only discussed briefly here, and explanations of CAPL
programming. The context-sensitive Help function (F1 key) describes all menu items
and explains the displays and controls of all dialogs.

1.4 Overview of the Programs


The following executable programs are part of CANoe:
• With the CANdb++ Editor you create or modify databases (*.DBC) which con-
tain the symbolic information for CANoe. This includes network nodes and sym-
bolic names for messages and signals as well as environment variables.
• In the CAPL Browser you create CAPL programs for the measurement and
simulation setups. Instead of using message identifiers and data bytes, with the
help of the database you can also work with message and signal names.
• The CANoe main program is used to measure and simulate CAN systems.
You can associate one or more databases to any configuration from
File|Database.
• In the Panel Editor you create the control panels that are later loaded in CA-
Noe. Panels represent the I/O interface between the user and the simulated
network nodes in CANoe's simulation setup. Besides standard buttons and
switches, in the Panel Editor you can also use bitmaps as display and control
elements. This involves configuring the bitmap element with the appropriate
bitmap file that you can create with any bitmap editor. Each display and control
element must be configured with an environment variable from the database so
that the display and control elements can be set or read-out by the CAPL mod-
els in CANoe. ("Wiring" of the panels to the simulated network nodes)
• The CAPL Generator is a tool for automating the generation of network node
models that can be used to simulate the remainder of a bus in a CANoe simula-
tion. Generation is based on CAN databases. The network node models are
generated as CAPL programs.
The CAPL Generator prepares the database for the generation of panels with
the Panel Generator. That is, the necessary environment variables are added to
the database, and they are assigned to the proper nodes by means of access
rights.
• The Panel Generator is a tool for automating the generation of panels which
are used for graphic user control and visualization of network node models.
Generation is based on CAN databases.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


33

The panels are generated as display and/or control panels in a node-based


manner. Environment variables are assigned to the nodes by means of access
rights.
Before a panel is generated with the Panel Generator the network node model
should be created with the CAPL Generator.

vpanel.ini Panel editor Database editor


vpanel32.exe candb32.exe

Bitmaps CANoe-Panel Database


*.bmp *.cnp *.dbc

CANoe config CAPL node


*.cfg *.can

CANoe CAPL browser


can.ini canbrow.ini
canoe32.exe canbr32.exe

NWM
canusr.dll

Figure 32: CANoe system overview

Start options for CANoe and Browser are provided in the linked INI files. If you are
starting Browser from CANoe's measurement or simulation setup, a temporary file
PARBROW.INI is automatically generated with the proper start options and is passed
to Browser.

1.5 CANoe Architecture


In the course of a measurement the PC-card registers CAN messages on the bus
and passes them through the simulation setup to the measurement setup, and from
there to the specified paths in the data flow plan and on to the evaluation and analy-
sis blocks at the far right of the plan. During a measurement two program modules
work closely together to this purpose: First the CANoe real-time library (CANRT.DLL)
retrieves the information arriving at the card, provides them with a time stamp and
shifts them to a ring buffer.
In a second step these data are read out by the actual main program (CA-
Noe32.EXE) and are evaluated in the function blocks on the right-hand side of the
data flow plan.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


34

Real Time Library Windows

Main Buffer
CAPL Transmit Measurement
Branch
ca. 1500 Msg (16 bit)
ca. 15000 Msg (32 bit)

Interrupt DPRAM

Rx Tx (ca. 100 Msg)

CAN
PC Boar d
CAN File

Figure 33: Internal structure of CANoe

You can influence the data flow in the two program modules by inserting function
blocks in the simulation setup and/or the measurement setup. The real-time module
is comprised of the PC-card block and the simulation setup. The function blocks in
the measurement setup will configure the data flow in the main program, with the ex-
ception of the real-time library.
If you insert blocks in the real-time library, CANoe's simulation setup, you should be
make sure that they do not demand too much computing time, so that system reac-
tion times are not lengthened. Moreover, in CAPL programs you may only access
files from here using special precautionary measures.

Note: If you overload Windows severely by other programs during a measure-


ment, there may be a delay in reading data out of the ring buffer. Never-
theless, the time stamp for the events, which for example is displayed in
the trace window, remains accurate even in this case.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


35

1.6 Particularities of the Demo Version


In the demo version of CANoe a demo driver which does not require a PC-card is
connected to the PC instead of a regular PC-card driver. However, the functions of
this driver are very limited. Primarily, it ensures that all messages which are transmit-
ted are returned as received messages with a accurate time stamps.
The bus parameter options and message setup which are selected by clicking on the
PC card icon in the simulation setup are irrelevant for the demo version and can be
disregarded.
With the demo version of CANoe you can insert up to a maximum of three network
node models in the simulation setup. If you load configurations with more than three
simulated network nodes, you will not be able to start the configuration any longer.
Aside from these limitations, the demo version is a fully functional version. In particu-
lar, messages can be evaluated and saved, and CAPL programming can be tested
without limitations.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


36

2 Applications
CANoe provides you a set of significant basic functions for the work on various bus
systems.
Functions as loading and saving configurations, assigning databases and configuring
panels, you call directly from items in the main menu. Particularly the data flow dia-
gram and the function blocks in the measurement and simulation setup window are
directly configured with context sensitive menus.
Therefore you have to choose a block in the data flow diagram and click on it with the
right mouse button to open the corresponding context menu.
For example you can insert new function blocks such as filters or generator blocks at
the black rectangular insertion points (hotspots) in the data flow or configure the PC
card with the bus icon on the right of the simulation setup.
A brief look at the data flow in the measurement and simulation setup gives you an
overview of the configuration options provided by CANoe and shows how your actual
measurement configuration appears. The configuration of the simulation is made in
the simulation setup window; measurements and analysis are configured in the
measurement setup window.

Program Start
At the program start of CANoe the programCANoe32.EXE is called by double clicking
the appropriate icon in the CANoe program group. CANoe can only operate trouble
free if the system directory contains all necessary files and the hardware has been
installed properly (compare enclosed instructions on hardware installation).

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


37

Figure 34: CANoe during a measurement run

At the program start CANoe first reads information on hardware settings, start paths,
editors used, etc. from the project file CAN.INI. in the system directory. Afterwards, a
configuration file *.CFG is read in. This file, which contains all information on the cur-
rently active configuration of CANoe, is updated automatically after a prompt at each
program stop.
You can specify a working directory in the program icon. To have this file loaded
automatically at the start you can also enter the name of a configuration file in the
command line for program names. This method can be used to configure CANoe dif-
ferently at the start by using multiple icons. If no entries were made in the command
line, the last opened configuration is automatically loaded.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


38

Figure 35: Automatic loading of the configuration AUTOMOT.CFG at program start

The CANoe Screen


The CANoe screen consists of the main menu bar and the toolbar in the upper por-
tion of the screen, the status bar at the bottom of the screen, and the data flow win-
dow and various measurement windows. You can gain access to all CANoe windows
by double clicking the specific evaluation block in the measurement setup or by se-
lecting the window from the View menu.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


39

CANoe panels

Main menu line

Toolbar

Statistics
window

Data window
Graphics
window 1
Write window

Bus statistics window Graphics


window 2

Trace window 1 Measurement


setup

Trace window 2 Simulation setup

Figure 36: The CANoe screen

After selecting an entry the relevant window is activated and is displayed in the fore-
ground.

Menu line Used to select basic functions


Toolbar Used for quick selection of important commands and also
contains status indicators for the number system being used
(decimal or hexadecimal) and to display of keyboard entries
made during the ongoing measurement.
Simulation setup In the simulation setup window the overall system is setup
and displayed graphically with the CAN bus and all network
Measurement setup nodes.
The measurement setup displays the program’s data flow. All
options are set in this window for parameterizing a meas-
urement or evaluation.
Trace window Bus activities are recorded here. The user can scroll in this
window after a measurement has been completed.
Statistics window The mean transmit frequencies of messages are displayed
as line spectra above the identifier axis in this window. As an
option, the user can toggle over to mean transmit spacing.
The window can be zoomed for detailed evaluations.
Data window Preselected data segments of messages can be displayed
here.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


40

Graphics window Graphic representation of signal time responses, which are


displayed in a X-Y diagram above the time axis. After the end
of measurement a measurement cursor and a difference cur-
sor are provided, with which you can examine the coordi-
nates of all measurement points or differences between two
measurement points precisely.

Write window Important information on the progress of the measurement


can be output here (e.g. triggering of logging function). Fur-
thermore, all outputs that the user places with the Write
command in CAPL programs are written to this window.
Bus statistics window Hardware-related information such as number of data and
remote frames, error frames and bus load are displayed he-
re. Availability of this information depends the CAN PC-card
being used.
Status bar The names of the active configuration file and the database
being used are displayed here.

2.1 Simulation/ Simulation Setup

2.1.1 Working in the Simulation Setup


Via the context menu (right mouse button) of the simulation setup you have access to
standard operations like copy, cut, paste etc. You can also apply these functions on
different bus systems. By means of the tabbed pages at the bottom of the simulation
setup window, you can easily change between the different buses of your configura-
tion.
Additionally you can easily shift objects. Just select the object with the left mouse
button and drag and drop it by pressing the left mouse button (drag-and-drop).
For a simple indication and display of the real and the simulated bus the following
colour code applies:
• real Bus
…is displayed as a black line.
• simulated Bus
… is displayed as a red line.

Additionally a simulation setup assistant is provided . This offers support in setups


for both simple single-bus systems and complex hierarchical multibus network sys-
tems which can be created with relatively little effort.

2.1.2 Gateway
Several nodes can be assigned to one ECU, which makes modelling of gateways
possible. A gateway is a special ECU, which is used as connection between two or
several buses.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


41

The information exchange between the buses is done via the nodes of a gateway.
This can concern several buses (of the same type) as well as a system of different
bus types (CAN, LIN,…).
Additionally there is the possibility to set up the interactive generator block (IG) as a
gateway (see chapter 4.2.2)

2.1.3 System View


The system view can be displayed on the right in the simulation setup window. For
this purpose please use the context menu (right mouse button) of the simulation
setup.
The system view shows a tree structure sorted according to buses. It offers a drag-
and-drop support, with which you can modify your simulation setup fast and easily.
Additionally there is a context menu available for all items of the tree structure, with
which you have fast access to important and frequently needed functions. You can,
for example
• execute a system verification (context menu at buses)
The result is displayed in the write window.
• define a (new) gateway (context menu of a node)
• execute a simplified "Copy/Cut-and-Paste" action

2.1.4 Object View


The object view shows you all substantial information about each active object (node,
gateway,…). Additionally it is displayed, whether the selected block is active (for the
generator block, the interactive generator block (IG) and the replay block).
The object view can be displayed on the right of the simulation setup window. Please
use the context menu (right mouse button) of the simulation setup to do so.

2.1.5 System Verification


You can start a system verification by selecting the System verification command in
the context/popup menu (right mouse button) of the System View. The System verifi-
cation checks your simulation setup according to the following rules:
• 1st Rule: All network nodes that are defined in a database must be in-
cluded in the assigned bus.
Example:
The database "ibus" defines the network "node" console and is assigned to the
bus "body" in the simulation setup. To carry out this rule, there must be a CAPL
block included in the simulation setup; this CAPL block has to be assigned to
the database node "console".
• 2nd Rule: All gateways that are defined in the databases must be included
as gateways within the simulation setup.
Example:
The databases "ibus" and "motbus" both contain the network node "gw" and are
assigned to the buses "body" and "power" in the simulation setup. These nodes

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


42

are interpreted as gateway definitions. To meet this rule, there must be a CAPL
block in the simulation setup that has to be assigned to a database node and
has to be included as a gateway.
It does not meet this rule, when a CAPL block is included as a node in one of
the buses while no database is assigned to this bus.
• 3rd Rule: All gateways that are defined in the databases must be included
as gateways in the assigned buses within the simulation setup.
Example:
This rule is slightly different to the 2nd rule. It does not meet to include a gate-
way – that is defined in the databases – in the available buses of the simulation
setup. The concerned CAPL block must be included as a gateway in the buses
to which the databases are assigned to.

2.2 Measurement/Measurement Setup

2.2.1 Measurement Start


The measurement is started by pressing the F9 key, by choosing Start│Start in the
main menu or by activating the start button on the toolbar. In Online mode data
can now be received and evaluated from the bus or can be sent out onto the bus.
The data flow diagram shows you which analysis and transmit blocks are active dur-
ing the particular measurement.
At the start of an Online measurement, first the CAN board is initialized. If this cannot
be done, an error message is output and the measurement is terminated.
During the measurement the user can configure the Trace block, Data block and the
scaling of the Statistics window and Data window. However, the menu items in the
popup menus of the remaining blocks are masked out for the duration of a measure-
ment. You cannot parameterize these blocks until after the measurement run has
ended. All keyboard inputs during the measurement are passed through directly to
the function blocks (CAPL programs, generator block, etc.). They are shown in the
relevant status window on the toolbar. The only available program controls are the
<Esc> key (terminate measurement) and all of the key combinations with the <Alt>
key (Window control under Windows).
You can stop the measurement by pressing the <ESC> key, selecting the main menu
item Start│Stop or activating the button on the toolbar.
Internally, the measurement can be terminated by the elapse of the post-trigger time
after triggering has occurred, or by the call of the stop() function from a CAPL pro-
gram.

Note: During high system loading the stopping process may take a certain
amount of time, since the system's message buffer must be emptied. A re-
peated stop command (double click) causes the buffered data to be ig-
nored, and the measurement is terminated immediately, even under high
system loading.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


43

2.2.2 Working with Configurations


All options that you configure (configuration of the measurement windows, simulation
setup, PC card, etc.) while working with CANoe can be saved to a configuration file
with the extension CFG). Thus, you can work with different configurations to perform
specific simulations, measurements and tests with CANoe.
To save changes of a specific configuration to a new configuration file choose the
menu bar item File│Save configuration as. With the menu item File│Load
configuration you can reload configuration files which you previously saved in CA-
Noe. In the demo directory DEMO_CAN_CN you will find some prepared demo configu-
rations that can serve as models when you start up CANoe and during the learning
phase.
To obtain an overview of the files belonging to your project (configuration files, log
files, CAPL programs, databases, Panel files , etc.) and to allow you to run them on
another computer if necessary, it is advisable to create a separate project directory
for each project (also called a working directory in Windows). Be sure to save all files
resulting from your work in this directory. If you are working on several different CAN
projects, multiple project directories are also advisable. With large projects it might
even be easier to distribute the databases and configuration files of a project to dif-
ferent subdirectories.

c:\...\myproject
myproj1.cfg, myproj2.cfg

.\modelle
ecu1.can, ecu2.can, test.can, sqr.gen

.\dbc
myproj.dbc, addon.dbc

.\panels
ecu1.cnp, display.cnp

.\bitmaps
myswitch.bmp, mybutton.bmp

Figure 37: Example of a Directory Tree for a CANoe Project

References to other project files (e.g. to database files *.DBC or to CAPL programs
*.CAN) are also saved in the configuration files. CANoe works internally with relative
paths. That is, referenced files are searched and read-in relative to the configuration
file during loading. Consequently, if you move your project directory with all associ-
ated files to another location in the directory tree or to another drive, the databases
and CAPL programs referenced by the configuration file are found and correctly read-
in at the next loading.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


44

Note: To document or archive configurations, from the menu item File|Files


used you can have a list generated of all files belonging to the active con-
figuration (databases, CAPL programs, etc.) or have a ZIP archive gener-
ated.

The last configurations you worked with are saved in the [LastCANoeConfigura-
tions] section of the CAN.INI file. The list of last opened configurations in the
File menu allows you to access these configurations. If you do not specify a start
configuration on the command line, the last edited configuration of this list is used at
the program start.

Saving Configuration in Older Formats


Older CANoe versions cannot read the current configuration file format. However, if
you still want to work with older CANoe versions you can save the configurations in
formats compatible with those versions.
Select the desired version in the File Type list. However, please note that the older
the selected format, the more configuration information that will be lost. Of course,
the active loaded configuration remains unaffected by this.
Please refer to online Help to learn the most important differences between the ver-
sions.

Importing Configuration Descriptions


As an alternative to loading configuration files (*.CFG), CANoe offers you the option,
via the menu item File│Import, of importing configuration descriptions (*.CIF). For
the most part, the format of configuration descriptions corresponds to the format of
INI files.
Configuration descriptions allow you to specify configurations directly in a configura-
tion description file, and to make adaptations there, e.g. to add more Trace windows
or change the paths of CAPL program files.
In Help you will find an example of the structure of a configuration description.

2.2.3 Representation Formats


The main menu item Configuration│Global Options opens a dialog for entering the
representation formats: Here you can select the numbering system (hex/dec) and
decide whether you wish to have CAN messages displayed as identifiers or - pro-
vided that you have associated a database - whether you wish to have them dis-
played symbolically.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


45

Figure 38: Dialog for configuring representation formats

These options affect the representation formats throughout the entire program.

Note: Please note that the numbering system in CAPL programs remains unaf-
fected by these options. Identifiers with the prefix 0x are interpreted as
hexadecimal values, analogous to the C programming language. Other-
wise the CAPL compiler always assumes that they are decimal numbers.

2.3 Working with Databases


When performing large-scale studies on the CAN bus, it is a great help to the user if -
in addition to the bus-oriented raw data format with numerical identifiers and data
contents - a symbolic interpretation of the message event is also provided.
CANoe supports the use of symbolic databases. You can make this information
available by associating one or more databases to the active configuration (Menu
item File│Associate database). Afterwards you can access the information in
measurement windows, insertable function blocks and CAPL programs.
In CANoe's symbolic mode you can address CAN messages and data contents by
the symbolic names of the associated databases. The sections below offer you in-
structions which you should observe if you use databases when working with CANoe.

2.3.1 Creating and Modifying Databases


The CANdb++ Editor is available to you for inputting and modifying databases. It is
included with the standard CANoe product.
In a database, names are assigned to CAN messages. In CANoe you can then ad-
dress the messages using these names. For example, the clear text EngineData is
shown in the Trace window instead of the identifier 100.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


46

Figure 39: Symbolic description of the message EngineData in CANdb++

Moreover, so-called signals are defined in the database. A signal is a symbolic de-
scription of a data segment within a message. Besides identifying the data segment,
the signal definition also incorporates characteristics such as machine format (Mo-
torola/Intel), sign handling, a conversion formula and physical unit of measurement.
This permits direct display of physical dimensions in the data window, such as:
"Speed = 810.4 rpm".
Please refer to the CANdb++ Editor documentation or CANdb++ Editor online Help
for further details on creating and modifying a database.

2.3.2 Access to Database Information


Besides the individual text input boxes, in general there are also small buttons for the
purpose of entering symbolic message or signal names in function blocks. When you
press one of these buttons you start the Message Explorer with all symbols defined in
the database. You can choose one or (in the case of the filter configuration dialog)
multiple names from the Message Explorer.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


47

Figure 40: Message and Signal Explorer

If the database has been filled out completely, you can search in this Explorer for e.g.
a node, a message or even a list of all signals in the database.
Please refer to online Help for further instructions on using the Message Explorer and
Signal Explorer.

2.3.3 Associating the Database


Please use the simulation setup to edit databases (add, assign, delete, etc.). In the
System View window of the Simulation setup you can see a tree view of the current
configuration.
If you go to Databases with the mouse pointer and click on the right mouse button,
you can run the command Add… from the context menu. This adds a database (or
an additional database) to the current bus.
After you have run the command, the Open window appears and you can select a
database.
If you click on the [OK] button, the new database is accepted for the current bus and
is displayed in the System View window.
With the Edit… command of the context menu you start the CANdb++ Editor. There
you can edit and save the selected database.
The name of the database is determined as follows. If the database includes the at-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


48

tribute DBName, then its value is used as the name. If the attribute does not exist,
the name is derived from the file name. The user can overwrite the name. Database
names must begin with a character and may not contain any blank or special charac-
ters.
The database name must be unique. If a name that is automatically determined al-
ready exists, it is assigned a unique name according to the sequence of names
CANdb1, CANdb2, etc.
You can assign both CAN controllers (CAN1 and CAN2) to exactly one database. All
other databases are assigned to the two controllers jointly. This assignment defines
the default selector for message definitions in CAPL.

2.3.4 Use of Multiple Databases


For large systems it may be sensible to distribute the descriptions of messages and
signals, as well as environment variables, to several partial databases. When operat-
ing CANoe on two buses it also makes sense to describe each system by its own
database.
CANoe supports the simultaneous use of multiple databases. You can configure the
databases that you would like to associate with CANoe using the menu command
File│Associate database. Afterwards you can use the symbolic names for mes-
sages, signals and environment variables from all databases in all function blocks
and in CAPL. To do this, you would simply enter the symbolic name in the appropri-
ate input box. There is a list of all symbolic names in the signal selection dialogs
which you can open by activating the small buttons next to the individual input boxes.
You would select the desired symbolic names there.
If you are using more than one database, the messages in the databases that follow
the first database are qualified with the database name, i.e. the message name is
preceded by the database name followed by two colons. However, you will only need
to use these qualified names to resolve ambiguities. As long as the symbolic names
are unique among all databases, you can forego qualification of symbolic names in
all function blocks and when editing CAPL programs.

2.3.5 Resolving Ambiguities


When multiple databases are used, it is essentially possible to have ambiguities in
the use of symbolic names. These ambiguities must then be resolved by the pro-
gram. On the one hand, messages arriving from the bus via one of the two CAN con-
trollers and logged by the program can have different symbolic names in two data-
bases. On the other hand, the user may wish to configure function blocks or meas-
urement windows with different messages that have the same name in different da-
tabases.
Ambiguities of the first type are resolved by the sequence in which you have entered
the databases in the list of the database selection dialog. Furthermore, you have the
option of associating a prioritized database to each of the two CAN controllers. For
messages received by this controller, this database then has highest priority in the
symbolic association. Only if the symbolic name is not found there, does the program
search all other databases indicated in the database selection dialog, and this is
done in the sequence defined there.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


49

The search sequence in the database list in the database selection dialog is also
used to resolve name conflicts when configuring measurement windows and function
blocks. In such a case, the name is associated with the message in the database that
is highest in the list. However, you can also resolve ambiguities of this type by quali-
fying symbolic names.
See CANoe's online Help function for examples of resolving ambiguities.

2.3.6 Checking for Consistency of Symbolic Data


In CANoe's symbolic mode the CAN messages are addressed using symbolic names
from an associated database. Therefore, CANoe checks the consistency of the data-
base and the active configuration in the following situations:
• At the program start,
• When a new database is associated,
• When CANoe is restarted after a change to the database.
In this consistency check, the symbolic names of all CAN messages used in the
measurement and simulation setups are compared to names in the database. If the
message name has been changed in the database, an automatic adaptation is made
to this name, and an appropriate message appears on the screen. If CANoe could
find neither the name nor the message ID in the database, the user receives an error
message. In this case the measurement cannot be started until the particular mes-
sage is removed from the configuration.

2.4 Working with Multiple Channels


CANoe supports up to 32 (virtual and real) CAN channels. Consequently, you can
also use multiple CAN cards to transmit and receive messages. This section de-
scribes what must be taken into consideration when working with multiple channels.

2.4.1 Channel Definition


The number of CAN channels you wish to use is configured in the Channel Definition
Dialog.
You can access this dialog from the main menu item Configure│CAN channels... on
the menu bar or from the PC card icon in the measurement setup. In addition to af-
fecting the measurement itself, the channel definition also affects the inputs that are
possible in the various configuration dialogs. Only defined channels are offered for
selection.
The channels are allocated to the CAN chips registered in the CAN hardware con-
figuration of your computer's Control Panel. Chip allocation is only meaningful in
Online mode. In Offline mode, in which messages are replayed from a file, it is irrele-
vant.
To change the default chip allocation, open the CAN Hardware component of your
computer's Control Panel. The CAN Hardware Configuration Dialog appears, in
which you can modify the chip allocations of the channels.
The chip allocation is also shown in the Hardware Configuration Dialog (cf. section
2.11.1).

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


50

Note: The number of channels is configuration-specific. It is saved in the configu-


ration file and is restored when loading the configuration.

2.4.2 Channels in Online Mode


In Online mode with a real bus (menu item Configure│Simulation...) messages
from the simulation setup are transmitted on one or more real buses, and in the
measurement setup they are received by one or more real buses. The defined chan-
nels correspond to these real buses with their controllers.
If you specify more than 2 CAN channels the following conditions must be satisfied to
be able to start a measurement:
• Your active CAN driver must support more than 2 CAN channels. If this is not
the case, you will receive a warning if you specify more than 2 CAN channels.
• A real or virtual CAN controller must be assigned to each channel. If this is not
the case, you will be requested to make such an assignment.
In the Channel Definition Dialog you can choose whether or not a consistency check
should be performed after configuration. The consistency check covers database as-
signments and the configuration of all function blocks with the exception of CAPL
blocks. The check monitors whether invalid channels are referenced. If this is the
case an inconsistency is reported. These reports can be output to the Write window if
desired.
With CAPL blocks a determination of whether all referenced channels are valid is not
made until compilation. A warning is output if any channels are invalid. Therefore, it is
advisable to recompile all nodes after each new definition of channels.
If you use undefined channels, CANoe behaves as follows in Online mode:
• Channel configuration does not cause any filtering of messages in the data flow
plan.
• When receiving on controllers not assigned to a defined channel, the received
messages are passed through the measurement setup.
• When transmitting from a Generator block or Replay block in the measurement
setup to an undefined channel, the transmit request is similarly passed through.
• An error is reported in the Write window for a sender in the simulation setup as
soon as the transmit request is given to an undefined channel. The message is
not transmitted.
• CAPL blocks do not transmit messages to which an undefined channel is as-
signed.

2.4.3 Channels in Simulation Mode


In CANoe's Simulation mode (Online mode, Simulated bus option in the menu Con-
figure│Simulation...) buses and network nodes are fully simulated.
Each channel corresponds to a simulated bus. Set up your channel definition accord-
ing to how many buses you wish to simulate.
If you use channels that are not defined, CANoe behaves as follows in Simulation
mode:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


51

• The channel configuration does not cause any filtering of messages in the data
flow plan.
• When transmitting from a Generator block or Replay block in the measurement
setup to an undefined channel, the messages are passed through.
• When transmitting from a Generator block or Replay block in the simulation
setup to an undefined channel, an error is reported in the Write window as soon
as the transmit request is given to the undefined channel. Afterwards, the mes-
sage is not transmitted.
• CAPL blocks do not transmit messages to which an undefined channel is as-
signed.

2.4.4 Channels in Offline Mode


In Offline mode the channels correspond to those channels on which the played-in
messages were logged.
Consequently, each message is played-in on the channel on which it was logged.
The channels in Offline mode correspond to the channels used during logging to the
log file. Therefore, you should define the number of channels such that it corresponds
to the number of channels that were configured for logging to the log file.
If you use undefined channels CANoe behaves as follows in Offline mode:
• The channel configuration does not cause any filtering of messages in the data
flow plan.
• If messages are played-in which are assigned to an undefined channel, these
messages are passed through the measurement setup.
• When transmitting from a Generator block or Replay block in the measurement
setup to an undefined channel, the transmit request is passed through.
• CAPL blocks do not send out messages to which no defined channel is allo-
cated.

2.5 CANoe in Load and Overload Operation


This chapter helps you to operate CANoe steady under more difficult conditions and
points out the limits under high- and overload behavior.

2.5.1 Behavior in Load Situations


At high bus loading the computing power of your PC may be insufficient - under some
circumstances - to simultaneously operate the more complex evaluation and display
functions (Statistics window with statistical report, Data and Graphic window with
many signals, Trace window in the chronological output mode, etc.). To prevent an
impending data loss the program therefore has mechanisms for detecting and han-
dling load situations.
If the rate of messages registered by the card is so high that CANoe cannot follow
along with processing any longer, the ring buffer between the real-time library and the
CANoe- application runs full. CANoe detects this when a High water mark limit is
exceeded (cf. Figure 41), and it automatically switches over to a load mode in which

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


52

display functions are reduced to provide more computing time for internal data proc-
essing.
When the high-load limit of the ring buffer is exceeded, the display of messages in
the Trace window is interrupted briefly under load operation to provide other analysis
blocks with more computing power. However, it is possible that not all messages will
be displayed in the window any longer during the measurement. You can recognize
this load situation during the measurement by an exclamation point (!) in the first col-
umn of the window. Although not all messages are shown, no data are lost. After you
stop the measurement, the entire set of information is available to you in the Trace
window, Graphic window and in logging.

2.5.2 Behavior with Data Loss


If the ring buffer overruns in spite of these measures, as a user you are immediately
informed of this data loss:
An occurring data loss is registered in ASCII logging. The ‘*’ symbol appears in the
line after which the data loss occurred. In the configuration dialog for the Log file the
Lost Data Message Box option also allows you to have a data loss shown in a sepa-
rate message window at the end of measurement.
The Bus Statistics window also indicates to you a data loss during an overload situa-
tion with the @ symbol. However, please note that the display of bus load and re-
ceived messages continue to function properly, since this information is provided by
the interface card and does not need to be computed by the main program first. Con-
sequently, the Bus Statistics display allows you to estimate the extent of the data
loss.

2.5.3 Fill Level Indicator


To allow you to observe the ring buffer between the real-time library and the main
Windows program more precisely, the program has a fill level indicator.
You can view the fill level during the measurement in the left corner of the status bar.
If the ratio between arriving and processed events is balanced, the indicator has a
green color. However, if it appears in red, significantly more events are arriving than
can be processed at the given time. This is a clear indication that the system is over-
loaded. If the queue fill level reaches an alarming limit, the system attempts to relieve
the load by selectively deactivating individual evaluation windows. If desired, you can
have the queue's state displayed with the help of the entry ShowMainQueue=0 in the
[System] section of the CAN.INI file.
You can also have the fill level displayed in the Write window. To do this, set a mini-
mum value of WriteLevel = 3 in the [Environment] section of the CAN.INI
file. Then, when the ring buffer overflows the Write window shows the report "Load
transition: NORMAL->DATA LOST" and informs you of the data loss. After the
overload situation has ended (e.g. after a brief burst on the bus) you are similarly
informed as soon as a normal situation has been restored. You can recognize this in
the Write window by the report "Load transition: QUEUE HIGH -> NORMAL".

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


53

High water mark

Normal Oper. Load Oper. Overload

Figure 41: Fill Level of the Ring Buffer

For testing purposes you can provoke overload situations yourself by taking hold of
the title bar of the main window with the mouse or by moving the window on the
screen. This will interrupt the main program's data display until you release the title
bar again. The work of the real-time library, however, remains unaffected by these
actions. If messages are being registered on the bus, the ring buffer will be filled
without the data being able to be processed by the main program, and as a result the
queue will overrun. As soon as you release the title bar you can observe the effects
of this overrun in the individual windows.

2.5.4 Optimizing Performance


To make it easier for you to configure CANoe for high bus loads, a performance wiz-
ard is provided under the menu items Help│Performance│Optimization and
Help│Performance│Optimization 2. This wizard performs a two-stage perform-
ance optimization. A report is generated in the Write window listing the configuration
options utilized in the optimization as well as their previous and new values. You can
undo the changes made at any time.
The wizard optimizes the following options:
• Output mode and update cycle for the Trace window
• Update cycle for bus statistics
• Trigger option Write full buffer to file (Logging)
• Buffer size for the logging trigger
• Update mode and update cycle for the Data window
• Buffer size and drawing mode for the Graphic window.
The wizard function Help│Performance│Undo cancels the changes of a previous
optimization of configuration options. The operations required for this are also sum-
marized in a report.
Please note that only those values can be restored which have not been changed in
the configuration dialogs since the optimization.

2.5.5 Configuration Options at High Bus Load


Besides the automatic deactivation function, which CANoe initiates in load situations,
you can manually switch the following analysis blocks to less computing-intensive
modes:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


54

Trace Window
In the Trace window choose the output mode Fixed position for cyclic update.
As a result, the window contents are no longer updated with each new arriving
message, rather they are only updated cyclically. You may need to select a
longer update time.

Data Window
If you have configured many signals in the Data window, you should choose the
cyclic refresh mode here (Configure Timer entry in the Data window's popup
menu) and enter a cycle time of maximum 500 milliseconds. The window is then
only updated cyclically which saves on computing resources.

Graphic Window
If you have configured many signals in the Graphic window, you should choose
a relatively large user-defined refresh (200 ms to 2 s) in the Measurement
Setup Dialog (Options item in the popup menu) . This defines how often the
graphic window display should be updated. Small values result in a fluid repre-
sentation of the signal response, but they place high demands on computer re-
sources, and with slower computers this might lead to performance problems.
High values, on the other hand, reduce computing demands but lead to a more
disturbed and delayed display of the signal response.

Statistics Window
Deactivate the statistics report in the Statistics window's popup menu to save on
computing power. Furthermore, the averaging time can be selected in the con-
figuration dialog of the Statistics block. Short time intervals place high demands
on computer resources and might result in severely oscillating lines in the win-
dow. Very long averaging times make the display slower, but also less comput-
ing intensive.
If you insert blocks in the real-time library, i.e. in CANoe's simulation setup, you
should ensure that they do not demand too much computing time, so that they do not
increase system reaction times. Furthermore, you may only access files in CAPL
programs if you observe special preventive.
On the other hand, it may be advisable at high bus loading to perform a data reduc-
tion as early as in the real-time library to relieve loading in the evaluation branches of
CANoe.
It is not possible to predict an optimal configuration of the measurement and simula-
tion setups for all situations. Cyclic updating indeed saves computing time, but also
leads to poorer representation of the information. Under some circumstances it may
be advisable to completely disconnect analysis branches that are not needed in the
measurement setup (Insert Break item in the hot-spot's popup menu) or reduce the
volume of data at the input to the measurement setup using filter functions. More-
over, you might also try to insert individual CAPL programs between the real-time
library and the evaluation branches and observe the behavior of the program during
another measurement run.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


55

To filter out certain messages from the measurement setup, pass filters and blocking
filters are provided as insertable function blocks. Furthermore, the supported PC
cards with acceptance filtering (Messages item in the popup menu of the card icon in
the measurement setup) also offer you the option of filtering out certain messages in
hardware, thereby relieving both the real-time library and the main Windows program
of the need to evaluate unnecessary information.

2.6 Working with Panels and Environment Variables


To permit working with simulated network nodes in CANoe, the network node models
in the simulation setup created in CAPL must be able to react to external events (e.g.
activation of a switch). CANoe also provides you with the option of creating your own
user control interfaces (Panels) and integrating them into the program.
This involves describing external events with the help of environment variables,
whose names and types (discrete/continuous/character string) you define in the da-
tabase.
CANoe differentiates between discrete, continuous and character string variables.
Switch positions can be represented by discrete environment variables; continuous
environment variables can be used to describe variables such as temperature or en-
gine speed, while character string variables can be used to represent whole words up
to a length of 24 characters.
You can interactively change the values of these environment variables during a
measurement by activating the controls on the panels. The network node models re-
act to changes in environment variable values and then execute the appropriate ac-
tions (e.g. sending out a message).
In the other direction, CAPL programs can also change the values of associated envi-
ronment variables when certain events occur. This value change can then be visual-
ized on the panel using display elements.
Therefore, environment variables can also be interpreted as I/O interfaces between
network nodes and their peripheries, i.e. the "wiring" between the particular CAPL
program and its input and output elements on the panels.
The tool for creating panels, the Panel Editor, is described in detail in chapter 5.

2.6.1 Assigning and Positioning Panels


You can assign panels to your active configuration from the main menu item Panel.
After selecting an upper entry, a dialog is opened in which you can link panels in CA-
Noe. This dialog is described in section 2.6.2.
You would choose the menu item Save panel positions to permanently save - in the
CANoe configuration - all of the loaded panels that you have arranged on the screen
according to your working requirements. Then the panels will appear at the same po-
sitions the next time the program is started.

2.6.2 Panel Configuration Dialog


Choose the menu item Panel│Configure Panels to configure the control and display
panels and panel control you wish to work with in CANoe. In the panel configuration

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


56

dialog you edit three lists which you select by activating one of the following three
option buttons:

Figure 42: Panel configuration dialog

Permanently Opened Panels:


In this list you enter all panels of the configuration which should remain perma-
nently opened, such as main panels which must always be available or panels
for panel control. The panels in this list are available to you as long as CANoe is
loaded. In particular, they are not affected by panel control actions.
Permanently opened panels which were closed explicitly are opened again by
panel control.

Panels to be Opened After Loading/At Measurement Stop:


In this list you enter all panels which should be opened when the program is
loaded or when the measurement is stopped. You will need the panels of this
list if you wish to set the values of certain environment variables before and af-
ter the measurement, to prepare for the next measurement. Please note that
the panels in this list are closed by activating panel control pushbuttons.
With the check box Close other panels you can set whether all those panels not
entered in this list should be closed at the stop of measurement. Permanently
opened panels always remain open, independent of the status of this check
box.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


57

Panels to be Opened at Measurement Start:


In this list you enter those panels which should be opened at the start of meas-
urement. These panels are then available to you during the measurement.
Please note that panels entered in this list are closed when Panel control but-
tons are activated.
With the check box Close other panels you can set whether all those panels not
entered in this list should be closed at the start of measurement. Permanently
opened panels always remain open, independent of the status of this check
box.
The selected list is configured using the buttons beneath the list:
Pressing the [Add ...] button causes a file selection dialog to appear, in which you
can select a panel. After exiting the dialog with [OK] the panel is inserted in the active
panel list. With [Remove] you can remove the highlighted panel from the list again.
The panel configuration file itself is not deleted by this action. To display the panel on
the screen you would press the [Display] button.
To edit panels select one or more panels from the active list and press [Edit]. This
opens the Panel Editor with the selected panels. If you have already edited a loaded
panel with the Panel Editor, after saving it you must press the [Display] button to
make the changes effective in CANoe.
To copy panels from one list to another, or to move a panel, open the popup menu in
the list box by clicking with the right mouse button. With Copy you can copy all se-
lected panels to the Clipboard. The Cut function removes the selected panels from
the list. With Paste you can insert panels which you previously copied to the Clip-
board into the active list.
For each of the two lists for the events Loading/Measurement stop or Measure-
ment start you can indicate whether all those panels not in the list should be closed
when the particular event occurs. To do this you would check the option box Close
other panels. The default setting (option box not checked) leaves these panels
opened. Please note that permanent panels remain open independent of the check
box.
In the measurement start list you can enter those panels which you only need during
the ongoing measurement. You will need the list of panels opened during loading or
measurement stop if you wish to set certain environment variables before and after
the measurement, in order to prepare for the next measurement. Please note that the
panel groups assigned to these two events are closed by other panel control actions.
Therefore, a panel which - for example - should remain open for the entire duration of
the measurement must be entered in the configuration lists of all panel control push-
buttons which can be operated during the measurement.
You can permanently save the panel positions. To do this, first open all panels by ac-
tivating the button [Open all panels] and then arrange the panels on the screen ac-
cording to your work requirements. When the [Save positions] button is pressed, the
active positions of all opened panels are saved in the CANoe configuration.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


58

Note: Simultaneously pressing the <Shift> key and moving the mouse pointer
over an element in an opened panel causes a window to appear below the
element, in which the name of the corresponding environment variable is
shown. If you have entered a comment for the environment variable in the
CAN database, the first comment line of the environment variable appears
next to the name.

2.6.3 Initialization of Environment Variables


You can configure options for initialization of environment variable values in the simu-
lation dialog by selecting the Configuration│Simulation.... menu item.
All environment variable values are preserved after the end of measurement, and if
the option Do not change environment variable values was set, they are assumed
as start values at the start of the next measurement. With this option you can also
intentionally assign start values to environment variables before the measurement
start. To do this, configure the appropriate control element on the panel loaded in
CANoe and then start the measurement.
If you activate the option Reset environment variable values before measurement
start to CANdb values, all environment variables are reset to their start values at the
beginning of a new measurement. To manually reset the environment variables to
their start values in the database before the start of a new measurement, press the
[Reset Now] button.
The function CallAllOnEnvVar() is provided in CAPL for the network node mod-
els in the simulation setup to permit reaction to the initialization of environment vari-
ables at the measurement start.

2.6.4 Panel Control


For complex models with many input and display panels, it is often impossible to ar-
range all of them on the screen simultaneously. On the one hand, the screen does
not provide enough space; and on the other hand, system resources are inadequate
to open an arbitrary number of panels simultaneously.
For measurements and simulation runs, however, usually only a small subset of all
panels is needed at the same time. Therefore, CANoe panel control provides you
with the option of grouping panels according to your work requirements. During the
measurement you can switch back and forth between these panel groups, so that
only one panel group is open at any particular time.
For this purpose, CANoe offers you two possibilities:

Creating Panel Control Buttons with the Panel Editor


With the Panel Editor you can create control panels with special elements, the
panel control buttons. Each panel control pushbutton is configured with a list of
the panels which should be opened when the pushbutton is activated. During a
measurement you can then selectively open the control panels of particular
panel groups, simply by pressing the appropriate panel control pushbutton.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


59

Furthermore, the panel configuration dialog also offers you the option of select-
ing certain panels which should remain permanently open, i.e. should not be in-
fluenced by the actions of panel control. Simply enter the particular panels in the
list of permanently opened panels. On the one hand, these may include the
control panels themselves, which should not be closed. Of course, on the other
hand you can also enter important display and control panels here which must
constantly remain open.
In the panel configuration dialog you can also enter panel groups for the two
predefined events Measurement start and Loading/Measurement stop. Panel
control opens the particular panel when the event occurs, just as though you
had pressed the particular configured panel control pushbutton. Here you can
also decide whether opened panels which do not belong to these events should
be closed or not.

Panel Control in CANoe


With Panel Control under the main menu item Panel you can arrange and po-
sition any panel group you want and save them under a defined name.
In this dialog Panel Control you can also open and close the defined panel
groups and single panels.
Note, that only one panel group and/or any single panel can be opened at a
time.

2.6.5 Configuring the Panel Control for Small Models


When small models are set up, it is often unnecessary to implement the mechanisms
of panel control. Here it is advisable to first enter all necessary panels into the list of
permanently opened panels. You should always use the list of panels to be opened
after the start of measurement if there are certain panels which you only wish to use
during the measurement. You can decide in the configuration dialog whether these
panels should automatically be closed again at the end of a measurement.

2.7 Logging and Evaluation of Measurement Files


CANoe offers you the option of saving the CAN data traffic in a log file, so that you
can evaluate it later in Offline mode.
Logging blocks are provided to you for this purpose. The task of a logging block is to
store data arriving at its input to a file. You can configure the log file in the measure-
ment setup by the file icon at the far right in the logging branch.
Each logging block is equipped with user-friendly triggering to reduce the amount of
data as much as possible even before acquisition. This permits the formulation of a
trigger condition, and data are only saved near the time of the trigger. During each
measurement multiple triggers can be initiated for various events, whereby the user
can prescribe pre-trigger and post-trigger times. The trigger condition is user-
programmable. You can configure triggering in the measurement setup via the
Logging function block.
CANoe has an Offline mode for analyzing log files. In contrast to Online mode the
data source here is a file, e.g. a file created by logging in Online mode. All measure-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


60

ment and evaluation functions of Online mode are also available to you in Offline
mode.

2.7.1 Logging Triggers


You can open the configuration dialog for the logging trigger by clicking the logging
block in the data flow plan or by selecting Configuration in the context menu.

Figure 43: Trigger Configuration Dialog

2.7.1.1 Trigger Modes


The trigger mode defines the general conditions for a logging (Start point, end point,
logging time period). You can select from three trigger modes:
• Entire Measurement
• Single Trigger
• Toggle Trigger

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


61

In the Entire Measurement trigger mode the entire measurement is logged. Pre-
trigger and post-trigger times cannot be selected. Activating the button Write full
buffer to file causes a full data buffer to be saved intermediately for long measure-
ments. You can avoid data loss in this manner.

Pretrig. Trigger Post-Trig.

Time axis

Log file

Pretrig. Trigger n Trigger n+1 Post-Trig.

Time axis

Log file

Figure 44: Time Window for the Trigger in Single Trigger Mode (top) and in Toggle-
Trigger Mode (Bottom)

In the Single Trigger trigger mode all those data occurring before and after a specific
trigger is logged. You can enter the necessary settings for pretrigger and post-trigger
times, and the number of triggers you wish to log, in the Time section.
In Toggle Trigger trigger mode the time window is described by two successive trig-
gers (start-of-block and end-of-block triggers). The first trigger activated during
measurement is the start-of-block trigger, and the second is the end-of-block trigger.
Afterwards, another start-of-block trigger follows, etc. The pre-trigger time in toggle
trigger mode is referenced to the start-of-block trigger, and the post-trigger time is
referenced to the end-of-block trigger. With the check box Use combined toggle
mode you define, that for start-of-block and end-of-block trigger the same trigger
conditions are valid.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


62

date Tue Oct 27 13:14:46 1998


Logging base hex
Header internal events logged
Begin Triggerblock Tue Oct 27 13:14:52 1998
6.0004 1 WheelInfo Tx d 8 69 0F 00 00 00 00 15
6.0151 1 ABSdata Tx d 3 A1 00 00
6.0501 1 GearBoxInfo Tx d 1 04
First 6.0501 log trigger event
Trigger block 6.0651 1 ABSdata Tx d 3 4E 00 00
6.1004 1 WheelInfo Tx d 8 EF 04 00 00 00 00 08
6.1151 1 ABSdata Tx d 3 4E 00 00
6.1181 1 EngineData Tx d 4 68 5B A3 00
End Triggerblock
Begin Triggerblock Tue Oct 27 13:14:55 1998
9.1004 1 WheelInfo Tx d 8 B5 06 00 00 00 00 32
9.1151 1 ABSdata Tx d 3 62 00 00
9.1300 1 ErrorFrame
Second 9.1300 log trigger event
Trigger block 9.1651 1 ABSdata Tx d 3 65 00 00
9.1771 1 EngineData Tx d 4 98 76 28 00
9.2004 1 WheelInfo Tx d 8 73 09 00 00 00 00 72
9.2151 1 ABSdata Tx d 3 68 00 00
End Triggerblock

Figure 45: Log file with 2 trigger blocks. Pre-trigger: 50ms, post-trigger: 100ms,
Trigger types: Message GearBoxInfo and Error Frames

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


63

For example, the entire measurement can be recorded in Toggle Trigger mode by
selecting Start and Stop as the trigger conditions. In this case, a start-of-block trigger
is activated at the start of measurement, and the measurement is logged until the
end-of-block trigger occurs when the measurement is stopped. Pre-trigger and post-
trigger times are ignored when this option is set.
You can determine whether the trigger action should be executed once or multiple
times. If the option Measurement stop after n triggers is selected in the trigger's
configuration dialog, the measurement process is stopped after the post-trigger time
of the nth trigger has elapsed.

2.7.1.2 Trigger Events


You can define trigger events using the five check boxes in the configuration dialog.
The following types are available to you:
The following types are available:
• Trigger on Start. Triggering occurs unconditionally and immediately at the start
of measurement. The logging time period is defined exclusively by the post-
trigger time in this case.
• Trigger on Stop. Triggering is executed at the end of the measurement. Trigger-
ing can be activated by the CAPL function stop() or by the <Esc> key. The
logging time period is defined exclusively by the pre-trigger time in this case.
• Trigger by a CAPL program: Using CAPL programming methods arbitrarily
complex conditions can be formulated, which can depend on the occurrence of
various events. Triggering is activated when the intrinsic function trigger() is
called by a procedure. The configured pretrigger and post-trigger times define
the logging time period for this trigger.
• Trigger when certain messages occur. With the Event trigger type, triggering
occurs when specific messages with specific attributes occur. To define these
attributes press the [Condition] button. The configured pretrigger and post-
trigger times define the logging time period for this trigger.
• Trigger on Error frames. Triggering is executed whenever an error frame oc-
curs. The configured pretrigger and post-trigger times define the logging time
period for this trigger.

2.7.1.3 Time window


In the configuration dialog you also define the time window (the pre-trigger and post-
trigger times in milliseconds) around each trigger.
The pre-trigger time defines the time interval before activation of the trigger condition
which is to be saved. If the trigger condition occurs so early that the pre-trigger time
is greater than the time since the start of the measurement, only those data occurring
prior to the trigger can be saved. Valid pre-trigger times must lie in the range of 0 to
180000 ms.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


64

The post-trigger time indicates how long data continue to be acquired and saved after
the trigger condition occurs. The measurement is terminated automatically after the
post-trigger time has elapsed. Valid post-trigger times must lie in the range of 0 to
180000 ms.

2.7.1.4 Configuration of the Logging Buffer


CANoe initially saves the data arriving in the logging branch to a ring buffer in the
PC's main memory.
Under Buffer size you can define the size of the buffer in which events are saved
intermediately during a measurement. Approximately 50 bytes of memory is taken
per message; however, this memory is only reserved as needed during the meas-
urement. Consequently, for very large buffer sizes Windows may swap-out portions
of the main memory to the hard drive during the measurement, and this may lead to
significantly delayed program execution.
After the trigger condition occurs the ring buffer is filled with raw data until the post-
trigger time has elapsed. The user can define whether the triggering process should
be run once or multiple times. If the option Measurement stop after n trigger
blocks is chosen, then the measurement process is stopped by the logging block
after the post-trigger time of the nth trigger has elapsed. At that time it transfers data
from the ring buffer to the actual log file. Depending on the quantity of data, this
memory transfer process may involve substantial waiting times.
Since the ring buffer is limited in size, data can be lost if the pre-trigger and/or post-
trigger times are too long. Then only the last data are recorded up to the point where
the post-trigger time elapsed, and an error message is output. If necessary the
measurement can be repeated with a data reduction filter inserted upstream.

Note: If you wish to write all data to file for a long-duration measurement you
should select the option Write full buffer to file. This option causes the
buffer contents to be written to the log file during the measurement as
soon as the prescribed (maximum) buffer size is reached. The buffer size
is of decisive importance with this option. To prevent excessive system
loading during saves to the buffer, and to prevent data losses, the buffer
should not be configured to be very large. Buffers of approx. 1000 mes-
sages have proven effective in practice. This option is only accessible in
Entire Measurement mode or in Single Trigger mode with the trigger
type Start.

To prevent data losses, especially at high system loading, you should observe the
following points:
• Close all applications that run in background and demand system time;
• Switch all blocks in the measurement setup over to Cyclic Update or disable
them entirely.
• Utilize filters for data reduction.
• Do not execute any unnecessary user actions during the measurement, such as
moving windows.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


65

If a data loss occurs in spite of these measures, you have the program inform you of
this by a message. To do this, activate the Data lost message box check box in the
Logging dialog. After the end of measurement a dialog box is then displayed.
Lines in the log file marked with a ‘*’ as a special symbol have corrupted lines around
them.
The symbol for the data loss disappears when the overload situation has ended.

2.7.2 Log Files


The icon for the log file (file icon) indicates that the data flow ends in a file.
Choosing the Log file command in the popup menu of the File icon to the right of the
Logging block opens the configuration dialog for the log file.

Figure 46: Configuration of the log file

The format of the log file is defined by the File format combination box. The user can
choose between binary and ASCII format. The binary format is recommended for
online measurements, since this format is faster in offline evaluation and also gener-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


66

ates smaller log files. When ASCII format is chosen, the data are saved as readable
text. The setting of the global switch determines whether decimal or hexadecimal rep-
resentation is used. Among other things, ASCII format can be used for data exchange
with external programs or for incorporating trace data into documents.
The Offline mode data source can be configured to be either binary or ASCII files.
The automatically preset extension of the file name is .LOG for a binary log file or
.ASC for an ASCII file. The recommended default name is CANoe.LOG or CA-
Noe.ASC.
To view or edit an ASCII file, double click the file icon or press the [Edit file] button in
the configuration dialog for the log file. You can use your own text editor for this. To
do this, enter the following line in section [Environment] of the file CAN.INI:
LogEditor=MYEDITOR.EXE
whereby you must enter the name of your own editor for MYEDITOR.EXE.
With the check box Increment logging file you can indicate, that the name of the
logging file is automatically incremented at start of measurement or after each trigger
block, after reaching a defined file size or after reaching a defined duration. This pre-
vents overwriting files that already exist.

In the configuration dialog you can indicate whether data losses in overload situations
should be reported to you. In the log file, the faulty lines are marked with a ‘*’ as a
special symbol.

Note: Analogous to output in the Write window with the CAPL function write(),
you can output text lines from CAPL programs to ASCII log files using the
functions writeToLog() and writeToLogEx().

2.7.3 Event Types in Log Files


In the following table you will find an overview of all events that are recorded in the
log file. When the function Log internal events is active in the file icon's configura-
tion dialog the internal events generated by the program (e.g. bus statistics informa-
tion, triggers, changes to environment variables etc.) are also logged. To have bus
statistics information generated the relevant option must be activated in the Card and
Driver Options dialog. There you also set how frequently these events should be
generated.
In the first column you will find all event types that are recorded by logging. In the sec-
ond column is the format of the particular event in ASCII logging. The third column pro-
vides information on whether the event can also be recorded in binary MDF log files.
You can determine from the last column whether the function Log internal event must
be activated to log the event.

Event type Format in ASCII Logging Binary Comments


CAN message <Time> <CAN> <Name or ID> <Attrib- Yes
utes> <DLC> <Data>

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


67

Event type Format in ASCII Logging Binary Comments


Error Frame <Time> <CAN> ErrorFrame Yes
Overload-Frame <Time> <CAN> Overloadframe Yes
CAN error <Time> CAN <CAN> Error: <Error Yes Internal event
message>
Environment <Time> <Variable name> := <Value> Yes Internal event
variable
Bus statistics <Time> <CAN> Statistic: <Data> Yes Internal event
Measurement <Time> Start of Measurement No
start
Logging Trigger Statistic: <Time> log trigger Yes Internal event
event
Trigger block Begin trigger block <Time and No
Start date>
Trigger block End End trigger block <Time and No
date>
Overload symbol ‘*’ at beginning of line after the data loss No Internal event
occurred.

2.7.4 Data Analysis in Offline Mode


To study recorded log files switch CANoe to Offline mode with the main menu item
Mode│To Offline.
The data source in Offline mode is a file, e.g. generated by logging in Online mode.
Analogous to Online mode, all measurement and evaluation windows are also avail-
able to you in Offline mode. The only option omitted is the possibility of sending data
over the bus. Furthermore, Offline mode provides a powerful search and break func-
tion, with which you can intentionally stop the replay of the log file. This is described
in section 2.7. In the logging block, which is also available in Offline mode, data can
be resaved to a new file, whereby targeted data reduction can be achieved by means
of insertable data manipulation blocks.
You can enter the name for this file under the Configuration… item in the file icon's
popup menu on the left side of the offline measurement setup. CANoe supports both
binary and ASCII logging formats for this.
The menu item below this, Break conditions... , opens a dialog in which you can set
an interruption point – a breakpoint. When the condition you have specified occurs,
the offline replay is interrupted until you resume replay of the file with the function
Run (F9), Animate (F8) or Step (F7).
You can configure the break condition with the [Conditions...] button, which is de-
scribed in more detail in section 2.7.5. If the tools provided in the configuration dialog
are inadequate, the CAPL language – with the function stop() – allows you to pro-
gram a breakpoint yourself.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


68

2.7.4.1 Flow Control in Offline Mode


The following functions of the main Start menu are available to you in Offline mode to
track the recorded bus proceedings on the screen in slow motion:

Start
The individual messages of the data source are read-out and are sent as
quickly as possible through the components of the measurement setup. In Off-
line mode the measurement can be resumed after a break. Reset must be
called for a new start.

Reset
After a measurement has been run through either partially or completely in Off-
line mode, it can be reset to the beginning again with Reset and can thereby be
studied from the beginning again.

Animate
Instead of reading data from the source file as quickly as possible, in Animate
mode only about 3 entries per second are read from the source file. This results
in a slow-motion representation of the processes. All of the display windows
may be active during this process, e.g. so that the user can easily observe the
sequence of messages in the Trace window. The Animate run can be inter-
rupted by the <Esc> key or the menu command Start│Break. The speed of the
Animate mode can be set with the following line in section [Offline] of the
file CAN.INI:
AnimationDelay=nnn
where nnn describes the time between the replay of two successive events in
milliseconds. (The default value is 300 [ms])

Break
In Offline mode this menu item interrupts the replay of data from the source file
(Animate run). The same can be achieved by the <Esc> key. A restart resumes
the replay at the point where it was interrupted by Break.

Step
This menu item (or the <F7> key) causes a single step of the measurement to
be run. Each time this is activated only one additional message is read from the
log file and processed in the data flow plan.
Within a measurement the user can switch back and forth whenever desired between
Start, Animate and Step.

2.7.4.2 Configuration of Online and Offline Modes


In principle, there are different measurement setups and completely separate pa-
rameter sets for Online and Offline modes, so that the two modes - including their
window layouts - can be configured differently.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


69

Nevertheless, it is often the case when switching between Online and Offline modes
that the user would like to assume the configuration settings made in one mode in
the other mode. Therefore CANoe provides the functions Online(Copy) and
Offline(Copy) in the main Mode menu.

Online
Toggles to Online mode. In Online mode a data flow plan is shown in the meas-
urement setup window, whereby the CAN PC-card serves as the data source.
The time basis in Online mode is real time, and clocks in CANoe and on the
CAN board are synchronized at the start. All time data are referenced to the
start of measurement. Data acquisition cannot be resumed after a break in
Online mode, rather it may only be restarted. The Animate mode is not possible.

Online (Copy)
Toggles from Offline mode to Online mode, whereby the data flow plan of Offline
mode is assumed with all of its function blocks. The corresponding portion of the
last Online configuration is lost in the process.

Offline
Toggles to Offline mode. In Offline mode a data flow plan is shown in the meas-
urement setup window, in which a file icon serves as the data source. Evalua-
tion of this file is begun by Start, and the evaluation can be resumed after a
break with <ESC>. Animate mode and Single-Step mode are also possible. The
time basis in Offline mode is based on the times recorded for the data in the file.

Offline (Copy)
Toggles from Online mode to Offline mode, whereby the portion of the data flow
plan of Online mode is assumed. This affects all window configurations and
function blocks. The last Offline configuration is lost in the process.
The mode switchover functions with copy represent a user-friendly method for as-
suming elaborate options such as trigger conditions, data display configurations or
CAPL programs, and it allows the user to begin immediately with analysis or a new
recording.

2.7.5 Trigger and Search Conditions


Conditions can be formulated for triggering logging and for interrupting an Offline
measurement. These conditions are always input in the same dialog.

2.7.5.1 Condition Primitives


A condition is composed of condition primitives that can be combined with logical or
or and.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


70

Example:
1.Primitive: ID > 100
2.Primitive: D0 == 0
A logical OR combination results in all those messages being found whose IDs
are greater than 100 or whose first data byte is 0. For a logical AND combina-
tion all those messages are found whose IDs are greater than 100 and whose
first data byte is 0.
The [Define] and [New Prim.] buttons are provided (only when a symbolic database
is used) for entering a new primitive.
The dialogs for entering and modifying primitives differ, depending on whether you
are working with a symbolic database ([New Prim.] button) or not ([Define] button).
The desired attributes can be input in the upper line. The identifier and data bytes are
input below this. Furthermore, a time window can be specified within which the
search is to take place.

2.7.5.2 Entry or Change of Primitives (without Database)


The same rules apply to both identifiers and data bytes. There is a toggle switch (Re-
lation) in the column after the object name, which defines the desired relation. If it is
empty, the object is not considered. If a relation is to be made, the user selects one of
the following symbols:

Symbol Meaning
== equal to
!= not equal to
< less than
<= less than or equal to
> greater than
>= greater than or equal to

After this is a mask to be executed, and the user must choose the numbering format
to be used:

Number format: Decimal


The desired value is entered here as a decimal number. To find the identifier
100 the following is entered:
ID == 100
The entry is illegal if there are still X (undefined) or $ (invalid) characters in the
input box.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


71

Number format: Binary


A mask is entered here which specifies bits to be set, bits not to be set, and bits
that are masked out, i.e. should not be considered. The characters have the fol-
lowing meaning:

X Masked out
1 Bit is set
0 Bit is not set

To find all messages whose first data byte is odd, the following must be entered:
D0 == XXXXXXX1

Note: It is possible to use >, < etc. in binary mode, but this is difficult to interpret
in mask conditions, and is only of interest to users who have a knowledge
of precise machine-internal data representation.

Number format: Hexadecimal


Here also masks can be specified. Integers can be entered in hexadecimal for-
mat, or nibbles (half bytes) can be masked out by X. The character $ represents
invalid. For example, it can result in the following case:
XXXXXXX1 is entered in binary mode, then a switch is made to hex mode. The
four X's on the left are converted to an X as a nibble. The lower values XXX1
cannot be interpreted as a completely defined nibble. Therefore, the result is
X$.

2.7.5.3 Entry or Change of Primitives (with Database)


When a symbolic database is used it is possible to trigger to messages and signals.
The SYM buttons Message name and Signal name after the text input boxes are
used to call the symbolic selection dialog, in which you can select the message - and
if applicable also the signal from the database - to which triggering should occur.
If you only enter a message name in the symbolic selection dialog, logging is trig-
gered whenever the message occurs on the bus.
If you select a signal name in the input box below this, a decision is made based on
the signal value regarding when logging should be triggered. The comparison of sig-
nal values is made based on their physical interpretations. This involves choosing a
comparison operator and entering a numeric value.
Physical dimensions are stored in discrete form in the CAN messages. Consequently,
the specified numeric value may not always be capable of being mapped to a dis-
crete value. In such cases, after pressing the Enter key or the [OK] button the two
next possible physical values are displayed in two boxes below your entry.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


72

Example:
The signal Enginedata.rpm is defined as a 16-bit unsigned value with an offset
of 0 and a factor of 10. If 1015 is input as the comparison value, the raw value
would have to be 1015/10 = 101.5. Since only discrete values may occur, either
101 or 102 is used, which corresponds to physical values of 1010 or 1020, re-
spectively. It is these two values that appear in the two information boxes.
In spite of discrete saving, valid values may still have digits after the decimal
point. If a factor of 10.5 were used in the above example, then 1008 and 1018.5
would be recommended as possible values.
You can also enter a time range for each primitive, within which it should be active.
Outside of this time range the condition would never be satisfied.

2.7.6 Exporting and Converting Log Files


The contents of log files can be exported or converted to other file formats with the
help of signal-based Logging Export. The configuration dialog for Logging Export is
opened by choosing the Export menu item in the popup menu of the File icon to the
right of the Logging block.

2.7.6.1 Export
The export can be limited to specific signals. To do this, the desired signals must be
selected in the Signals selection list.
In the Expanded Options dialog that is opened by pressing the [Expanded] button
in the Logging Export Configuration dialog, the user can define in the Actions field
those programs that can be started after an export.

2.7.6.2 Conversion
Conversion of log files is supported in both directions, i.e. ASCII->Binary and Bi-
nary->ASCII.

2.7.7 CANlog support


CANlog is a programmable data logger for CAN systems. CAN messages of different
CAN devices can be received and stored. Also trigger conditions created in CANoe
can be exported directly to CANlog.
Choose in the context menu Export to CANlog
• Export to file, to create a CANlog configuration file
• Export to device, to configure the CANlog hardware directly with the trigger
conditions created in CANoe
More information about CANlog support you can find in the CANoe online help.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


73

2.8 COM-Server
A COM-Server is implemented in addition to the DDE-services. It helps the program
to be gated or controlled by other applications. Besides accessing configuration-
specific data it is also possible to control the measurement. You can also call CAPL
functions, read signal values, and both read and write access environment variables.
Control cam either be realized by COM-ready script environments (ActiveX Scripting:
VBScript, JScript, Perl, ...) or by stand-alone applications, which can be written with
RAD development environments (Visual Basic, Delphi, ...) or in C/C++.
Please see the Online-Help for a more detailed description of the COM-Server.

2.9 Troubleshooting
See section 2.10 for a list of error messages occurring during initialization or during a
measurement. In this section tips are offered for handling problems of a general na-
ture.

CANoe will not start


CFG file destroyed?
Often it is helpful to delete the active configuration file MYCONFIG.CFG. First,
the file should be backed up under a different name so that its contents are not
lost. After the problem has been cleared up it can be renamed back to
MYCONFIG.CFG.

CANoe runs too slowly


Power managers, which are particularly common on notebook computers, may
not be installed for CANoe operation. Among other things, the power manager
deprives the application of CPU for long periods of time. Therefore, transmit
times are incorrect and messages can be lost when a power manager is in-
stalled. To remove the power manager from your system, please compare the
instructions in the installation guide of your hardware.
For less powerful computers it may also be advisable to reduce the resolution of
the system clock. The time stamps for messages may then be less accurate,
but fewer demands are placed on computer CPU. To do this, enter the following
line in section [PCBOARD] of the CAN.INI file:
Timerrate = 200
or under some circumstances even the value:
Timerrate = 400
These correspond to time resolutions of 2 or 4 milliseconds, respectively.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


74

Card cannot be initialized

Timeout ...
With error messages of this type, CANoe cannot establish a connection to the
CAN hardware. Check the installation of the CAN card. Please compare the in-
structions in the installation guide of your hardware.
Above all, notebook PCs frequently use a power manager. This must be deac-
tivated! (please compare the instructions in the installation guide of your hard-
ware).

Error message: "Error in transmission"

Immediate state change of CAN controller to ERROR PASSIVE


• Bus not connected?
The bus connection should be checked, and possibly also the pinout of the
connector being used.
• Terminating resistor present?
In particular, the CAN AC2 version with 82527 controllers reacts sensitively to a
missing bus termination.
• No partner on the bus?
If the bus is only connected to one of the two CAN controllers, and there are no
other bus nodes, the controller does not receive any acknowledge for transmis-
sion attempts.
• Baud rate and output control set?
The controller register can be programmed by the popup menu of the CAN-card
icon. See section 2.11 for a more detailed explanation.

Error message:
An error has occurred in ...
For further information please report the
LINE and FILE to our Hotline
At the current level of technology it is impossible to develop completely error-
free programs that are non-trivial. Unfortunately, this is also true of CANoe. To
better localize and correct system errors that occur very seldom, CANoe has di-
agnostic mechanisms that report these errors. Please be sure to write down the
exact text of the error message. With this information our telephone Customer
Support can then help you to correct the problem more quickly.

2.10 List of Error Messages to the CAN Interface


Error messages related to communication between CANoe and the CAN PC-card as
well as errors on the CAN bus or in the CAN card firmware appear in this list. In each
case, a clear text and an assigned error number are given. Some of these messages
are hardware-specific and therefore do not occur with all card types.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


75

Message was not transmitted (14)


The last transmit request was not executed by the CAN controller. This may be
due to the error status of the controller, or due to the accumulation of too many
higher priority messages.

DLC error (1128, 111, 112)


With the CANIB card a smaller DLC is specified in the DPRAM setup than
should be transmitted. This size must be adjusted in the CAPL generator block
or replay block.
This error can trigger other consequential errors. When problems are encoun-
tered the computer should be rebooted with a cold start!
Due to a firmware error in CANIB, a DLC equal to 0 cannot be processed.
Therefore, it is set to at least 1 in the driver. However, an adjustment for calcu-
lating the size of the available DPRAM will not be implemented until Version 2.0.

DPRAM Overflow (5) DPRAM


In the message setup more messages are defined than the DPRAM can re-
ceive. Due to the fact that CANoe checks the number of messages, this report
doesn't appear.

Incorrect controller no. (3,10,113)


An attempt was made to access a nonexistent CAN controller. Most CAN cards
supported by CANoe have two controllers. But there are also cards with just
one controller.
Remedy: Look for a message CANn... in the CAPL programs, where n is
greater than the number of existing controllers. This must be replaced by a cor-
rect number.

Incorrect module number (109)


No CANIB was found at the address given. If the port address has been
jumpered over on the card, this must be communicated to CANoe See the
manual.

Incorrect checksum (1368)


The CAN controller detected a faulty CRC checksum.

Incorrect terminating code (1432)


For CANIB cards this is the error code for general firmware problems. These
occur primarily in BUSOFF and ERROR_PASSIVE states.

Incorrect card type (8)


CANoe card driver and hardware are not compatible.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


76

Remedy: The correct CANoe version should be started, or another CAN card
should be installed.

Error in statistics request ()


The CAN card or its firmware does not support bus statistics.

Faulty ID, DLC etc. (1544)


Can neither appear at the CANalyzer Window nor at CANoe.
Exception: CANIB. Description see 1128

FIFO entry>16 (114)


CANIB has reported invalid data to CANoe. A potential cause for this is a RX
buffer overrun. This cannot be detected directly if the CANIB was not initialized
correctly. If its jumpers are transposed the user should follow the instructions in
the CANoe manual.

Interrupt not found (108,2016)


Proper communication could not be established with the CANIB card. A check
should be made to determine which interrupt is jumpered on the CANIB card,
and whether there could be collisions with other hardware. It is often the case
that there is an overlap conflict with the mouse interrupt. The CANIB driver itself
can determine the interrupt allocated to CANIB. If this is unsuccessful the IRQ
number can be entered explicitly starting with Version 2.0 (see
BOARDCFG.INI).

No final code received (1384)


Can neither appears at CANalyzer nor at CANoe.

No access to IMP (12)


The firmware hasn't received access to the interface management processor of
the Full CAN Chips 82526.

No reply from CAN controller (106)


The firmware could not establish a connection to the CAN controller. This is an
indication of a defective CAN card.

No messages in RX buffer (1)

No message received (7)


No data are currently being received by the card.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


77

Command from driver not supported (6,11,1528)


CANoe has sent a command to the card driver which it or the firmware does not
recognize. Example: A bus statistics request to a card without the appropriate
logic.

RX buffer overrun (101)


The receive buffer could not accept any more received messages.
There are several methods for remedying this situation:
• Insert breaks in branches of the data flow plan which are not needed. In an ex-
treme case the statistics block, data block and trace block can be disconnected
by breaks. The measurement is recorded with the logging block and afterwards
is evaluated offline.
• For Basic-CAN controllers a reduction in the data stream can be achieved by
acceptance filtering. Except in special applications the second controller in par-
ticular may be completely disconnected by this method.
• For Full-CAN controllers data reduction can be accomplished by striking mes-
sages in the message setup in conjunction with filter blocks.
• Switching-off the statistics report or other unnecessary options.

RX register overrun (105)


The Basic-CAN 82C200 controller has only two internal registers for accepting
messages. At higher bus frequencies and higher message rates, newly arriving
messages overwrite this buffer before the firmware can read out the register.
Correction: Use acceptance filtering.

Timeout (1080)

Timeout while accessing card (4,232)


Communication problems with the firmware occur during a measurement.
Remedy: Terminate measurement and restart. If this does not help, the reset
button can be pressed for some cards. Otherwise, the PC should be rebooted.

Timeout during card initialization (0)

No reply from the card (1400)


No connection could be established with the firmware when the CAN card was
initialized.

TX buffer full, TX-REQUEST rejected (2)


The transmit buffer is still full. The new transmit request cannot be processed.
There are three possible reasons for this:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


78

• CANoe is transmitting data faster than the firmware can receive them and pass
them to the CAN controller. This may occur, for example, if higher priority mes-
sages are being transmitted on the CAN bus.
• The number of messages transmitted one directly after another in a CAPL pro-
gram is larger than the transmit buffer. This problem occurs primarily when
transmission is executed in a loop in CAPL programs:
for (i=0;i<50;i=i+1) output(Msg);
Remedy: Fast transmission by setting msTimers and in reaction to the timer
event.
• The CAN controller being addressed is in the BUSOFF state and therefore can-
not accept transmit requests any longer. This can be detected in the bus statis-
tics window.

Übertragungsfehler (1352)
Kann weder bei CANalyzer noch bei CANoe auftreten.

Unknown transmit identifier (100,1496)


A message which is to be transmitted is not entered in the message setup of the
Full-CAN controller.

Invalid DPRAM address (107)


When the CAN card was initialized, an illegal identifier was entered for the
DPRAM address. See card documentation.

2.11 The Interface to the Hardware


In Online mode1 the data source of CANoe is the CAN PC-card. It provides mes-
sages received from the CAN bus with the time of reception. Furthermore, if desired
it can also acknowledge transmit requests with the exact time of the request and pro-
vide transmitted messages with the exact time of transmission.
Depending on the hardware used, other events might be provided by the board.
These may include, e.g. detection of Error or Overload frames, measurements of bus
load or the arrival of external trigger signals.
CANoe supports a maximum of 32 (virtual and real) channels. Consequently, you can
also use multiple CAN cards to transmit and receive messages. The number of CAN
channels to be used is set in the channel definition (cf. section 2.4.1).
The hardware is initialized at the start of a measurement. You must communicate the
parameters required for this to CANoe before the measurement start. Parameters are
configured from the menu bar with Configure│Hardware or from the popup menu of
the card icon on the left side of the simulation setup, which you can obtain with the
right mouse button or by <F10> on the keyboard (cf. section 1.2.1). Parameterization
is hardware-dependent. It is described below for CANcardX, which contains two SJA
1000 CAN controllers. For other cards (CAN-AC2, CANcard, etc.) the description is

1
The Offline mode for the analysis of log files is described in section 2.7.4.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


79

supplied with the card. Operation of the various dialogs and the meanings of input
boxes are explained in online Help.
Each channel can be parameterized independently. Consequently, applications can
be supported which have independent bus systems with differing speeds.
When creating a new measurement setup, default values are configured automati-
cally for the particular controller type.

2.11.1 Configuring the Hardware


You can obtain the dialog for hardware configuration from Configure│CAN bus pa-
rameters... on the menu bar.
On the left side of the dialog is an overview of the channels defined in the active con-
figuration. The number of channels can be set in the Channel Definition Dialog (cf.
section 2.4.1).
When you click on a channel symbol with the left mouse button, you will see the chip
allocation for this channel on the right side of the dialog. The chip allocation is the
allocation of the application channels to the CAN chips registered in the system. This
can be configured in the CAN hardware configuration section of your computer's
Control Panel.
After the sub-icons drop down in response to double clicking on the channel icon or
clicking once on the [+] symbol, the chip icon appears beneath the channel symbol
with the label Setup and two items with the labels Acceptance filter and Options.

Figure 47: Configuration of Hardware

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


80

When you click the Setup chip icon the sub-dialog for bus parameterization appears
on the right side, with which you can configure the chip's baudrate and bus registers
(cf. section 2.11.2). When you click the Acceptance Filter item, on the right side you
see the sub-dialog for configuring the chip's message acceptance filtering (cf. section
2.11.3). Finally, with the Options item you obtain a sub-dialog for configuring driver
and card options (cf. section 2.11.4).
You can confirm all entries with the [OK] button or reject them with [Cancel]. If you
only wish to undo the entries of one of the sub-dialogs mentioned above, press the
[Undo Page] button in the particular sub-dialog. If a channel icon is selected [Undo]
will cancel all changes (Setup / Mask / Options) made to this channel.

2.11.2 Programming the Bus Parameters


In the Setup sub-dialog you can directly configure the desired baudrate for the CAN
chip in the relevant input box.
As soon as you leave the input box (by <TAB> or mouse click in another option box)
the associated register values are calculated and all relevant option boxes are up-
dated automatically.
There may be additional input boxes - depending on the particular type of chip - for
directly programming the CAN chip registers:

Figure 48: Bus Parameters Dialog

Above the list you see the input boxes for clock frequency and number of samples.
Shown after the list is the prescaler resulting from the register values.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


81

The CAN controllers are provided with 16 MHz clocks when delivered, and as a rule
16000 (kHz) should be entered in this box. However, it may be necessary to change
out the clocks for special applications. Then the appropriate frequency must be en-
tered here.
In the Samples input box you set the number of bus samples per bit time. Possible
values are:
• 1 Sample.
This setting is recommended for High Speed Buses (SAE Class C).
• 3 Samples.
This setting is recommended for Low/Medium Speed Buses (Classes A and B)
to filter out level peaks on the bus.
The two Bus Timing Registers define how an individual bit of the serial bit stream is
assembled on the bus. Please refer to the data sheet for the CAN controller (SJA
1000/82C200/82527/72005) for the values that should be entered here. Input the
values as hexadecimal numbers. On the right side of the dialog box you can deter-
mine whether the entered values are plausible (e.g. whether the desired baudrate
has been achieved).
There are multiple Bit Timing Register pairs for a given baudrate which determine the
timing of the CAN controller with regard to the sampling time point, number of BTL
cycles and synchronization jump width (SJW). You can view a selection of allowable
register pairs in the list of sampling options.
Displayed in this list are all Bus Timing Register values for the configured baudrate
and sample count. Shown next to the register values are associated values such as
the sampling time point (Sample) in percent of bit time after the beginning of the bit,
number of BTL cycles (BTL cycles) and the synchronization jump width (SJW).
Once you have changed the baudrate or sample count, click on the list box to update
the list. Afterwards you can select the desired sampling option.

Representation of Bit Timing


The figure in the upper right area of the sub-dialog sketches the timing of the CAN
controller resulting from the configured register values. It depicts the bit time sche-
matically, subdivided into three regions Sync (orange), Tseg1 (blue) and Tseg2
(green).
The number of subdivisions corresponds to the value that is set for BTL cycles. The
sampling time point (border between Tseg1 and Tseg2) is identified by one or three
small red triangle(s) according to the setting for sample count. The ratio between the
bit length up to the sampling point and the overall length of the represented bit time
corresponds to the percent value of the actively selected list entry.
Above the figure you see the Preview Synchronization Edge selection box which is
deactivated by default, whereby the slider beneath it is also deactivated. Please note
that this slider does not have any functionality as a control; it is only used for preview-
ing purposes.
Click on the Preview Synchronization Edge selection box to activate previewing.
With the help of the slider above the figure you can examine the effects of the syn-
chronization edge and synchronization jump width on CAN controller timing. The

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


82

slider is intended to represent the time point of a synchronization edge on the bus,
i.e. the beginning of a bit with recessive-dominant edge. The upper area of the figure
shows the nominal bit timing, i.e. a bit on the bus is depicted as it is expected by the
controller. The lower area of the figure shows the internal controller timing, i.e. the bit
time interval from the controller's perspective. The length of this bit interval depends
on the time point of the arriving synchronization edge:
If the edge falls within the Sync region of nominal timing, then the chip is running
synchronously. If the edge falls within the Tseg1 region of nominal timing, then resyn-
chronization must be performed. In this case the Tseg1 region is lengthened by up to
SJW (Synchronization Jump Width) BTL cycles. If the edge falls within the Tseg2 re-
gion of nominal timing, then resynchronization must be performed. In this case the
Tseg2 region is shortened by up to SJW (Synchronization Jump Width) BTL cycles. If
no edge falls within nominal timing, this bit time is not utilized for resynchronization.

Disconnecting the Transmit Branch


Since the CAN controller on the PC card represents the interface between the analy-
sis software and the CAN bus, the bus is influenced by the measurement process. In
particular, the CAN controller gives its acknowledge for correctly recognized mes-
sages by placing a dominant level on the bus at the relevant slot in the CAN mes-
sage. To reduce the influence on the system, this functionality can be explicitly deac-
tivated on the SJA 1000 controller. However, please note that when the acknowledge
is deactivated communication can only occur over the bus if at least one other bus
node sends an acknowledge.

Note: The acknowledge on the CAN-AC2 card can be deactivated as follows:


with 82C200 controller, set the output control register on 0x02 (default is
FA)
with 82527 controller, interrupt the TX line (jumper 9 must be removed on
PB1 resp. PB2)

2.11.3 Acceptance Filtering


With all Basic-CAN controllers on the PC card (SJA 1000/82C200/82527/72005) a
mask controls which messages can be transmitted and which can be received.
For example, the SJA 1000 has one acceptance filter for standard identifiers and one
for extended identifiers, and it expects separate acceptance mask and acceptance
code. The acceptance mask indicates which bit of the ID should be compared with
the acceptance code. If the bit is 1 in the mask, then that particular bit is irrelevant for
the comparison. If it is 0, that bit of the ID is compared with the corresponding bit of
the acceptance code. If these two bits are identical, the message is received; other-
wise it is filtered out. Both the mask and code are entered as hexadecimal numbers.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


83

Figure 49: Acceptance Filtering with the SJA1000 Controller

Instead of entering the mask and code directly, you may program acceptance filtering
in CANoe using a logical mask (Acceptance filter for standard indentifiers or
Acceptance filter for extended identifiers). You can enter one of the values 0, 1 or X
for each bit in this mask. A message occurring on the bus is only be received if all
mask bits given as 0 or 1 agree with the corresponding message bits. Bits shown as
X are not utilized in the comparison ("don't care"). The values of the acceptance
mask and acceptance code are automatically calculated and displayed after inputting
the logical mask.
You will find a detailed explanation of acceptance filtering for all supported CAN con-
trollers, with examples, in online Help.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


84

2.11.4 Card and Driver Options

Figure 50: Card and Driver Options Dialog

Depending on the CAN PC card used, various options may be configured in this dia-
log. These include:
• Reporting the time point of a transmit request (TxRq) to measure delay times.
• Choosing whether bus statistics should be displayed, as well as their
• display refresh rate.
The context-sensitive Help function offers more detailed descriptions for your particu-
lar hardware platform.
The actual display of statistical data can be deactivated separately by disconnecting
the Bus Statistics window from the data flow. This will enhance performance. In con-
trast to a complete disabling of bus statistics support, data can still be logged and
evaluated later in Offline mode.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


85

3 Windows
You can modify the arrangement of windows (Window layout) from the Window main
menu:
With Standard Layout the standard window layout is loaded. It is makes sense to
call this function if you have changed the window sizes and positions and wish to
quickly return to the standard configuration. In contrast to the function File│New con-
figuration this function only acts on the window layout. All other configuration set-
tings are preserved.
Select the function Set user-defined layout to define a window arrangement (Lay-
out) according to your working requirements. this window layout is saved in the file
CAN.INI. With the menu item User-defined layout you can finally arrange the win-
dows of each opened configuration according to the settings made with this function.
In the lower menu area all recently opened windows of CANoe are shown. Addition-
ally, the active window is marked with a .
For Trace windows and the Write window, the window's font can be set from the win-
dow's popup menu with the function Font│Select. The fonts of function blocks and
function block comments e can be configured in the measurement setup.
The predefined font can be set for a window with the function Font│Reset.

3.1 Simulation Setup


The overall system with the busses (Multibus System) and all network nodes is dis-
played graphically in the simulation setup window. This figure corresponds to a rep-
resentation of the phases 2 and 3 described in section 1.1. The simulated bus of
phase 2 is represented by a red horizontal line. The black line above it symbolizes
the physical bus of phases 2 and 3. The two buses (simulated and real) are con-
nected to one another through the PC-card.. The card can be parameterized (baud
rate selection, acceptance filtering, etc.) using the main menu or the card icon's
popup menu. The popup menu can be accessed by clicking the card icon with the
right mouse button or by selecting the card with the cursor keys and then pressing
the <F10> key.

3.1.1 Configuration of the Simulation Setup


The block for the PC-card can be seen on the right side of the simulation setup. Sec-
tion 2.11 describes how you can configure the card using this icon. The simulated
bus (displayed as a red line) and the real bus (displayed as a black line) are con-
nected to the card block.
If you click the bus symbol with the right mouse button you get the popup menu for
the two buses (simulated and real). By repeated selection of the menu command In-
sert network node in the popup menu of the bus image you can insert as many
network nodes as you wish in the simulation setup and connect them to the simulated
or real bus. The status of all nodes can be switched over simultaneously using one of
the two menu commands Switch all nodes to real-time mode or Switch all nodes
to simulation.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


86

Simulated network nodes are shown with red connection lines to the simulated bus in
the simulation setup. During a measurement their functionality is simulated by the
assigned CAPL program. In this case, the network node's bus behavior does not dif-
fer from that of a real controller with the same functionality. In contrast, real nodes
are shown with black connection lines to the real bus. The network node models of
real nodes do not have any effects on the measurement.
To switch over the status of the currently active node in the simulation setup simply
press the spacebar. Each time the spacebar is pressed the node status changes from
simulated to real to off and then back to simulated.2

Figure 51: CANoe Simulation Setup

Besides network nodes you can also insert generator blocks and Replay blocks in the
simulation setup. To remove a network node from the simulation setup choose the
command Delete this Node in the node's popup menu, or select the node in the
simulation setup using the cursor keys and then press the <Del> button. The as-
signed CAPL program is not deleted by this action.

Note: When transmitting from CAPL programs, you can explicitly specify in gen-
erator blocks and replay blocks which the two CAN controllers (bus con-
nections) should be used to transmit the message. This is observed ac-
cordingly by the card driver.

2
In this version of CANoe the option real has the same effects as the option off.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


87

3.1.2 Layout of the Simulation Setup


With the context menu item "Group Blocks" of the simulation setup you induce CA-
Noe to arrange the node symbols separately in different bus threads depending on
their function (generators, CAPL blocks, ...)

3.2 Measurement Setup Window

3.2.1 Data Flow in the Measurement Setup


The data flow diagram of the measurement setup contains data sources, basic func-
tion blocks, hotspots, inserted function blocks and data sinks. Connection lines and
branches are drawn in between the individual elements to clarify the data flow.

Figure 52: CANoe Measurement Setup

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


88

In Online mode the PC-card serves as the data source. It registers CAN messages
on the bus and passes them on to CANoe.
Moreover, some of the supported PC-cards also provide additional information such
as the detection of Error and Overload flags, the values of error counters, the bus
load and external trigger signals.
The card is initialized at the start of an online measurement. You can configure the
necessary parameters from the main menu under Configuration or from the popup
menu of the simulation setup's card icon. The connection to the measurement setup
is symbolized by the >> symbol on the left in the measurement setup window.
In the evaluation branches of the measurement setup, data are passed from left to
right to the measurement setup's evaluation blocks, where they can be visualized
and analyzed with various functions.
Filters or user-defined analysis programs can be inserted in the data flow diagram
before the evaluation blocks. As a result, the data flow can be configured in many
ways to suit the particular task.
Each evaluation block has a measurement window in which the data arriving in the
block are displayed. The functions of all measurement windows are described in de-
tail in the sections below. Only the logging block is not assigned its own window. In-
stead, a log file is assigned to it for the purpose of logging bus data traffic and then
studying it "offline" (cf. section 2.7.2).
Located between the function blocks are insertion points (hotspots), at which blocks
can be inserted for to manipulate the data flow (Filter, replay, generator block, CAPL
program block with user-definable functions). Before and after the block inserted in
this manner, new hotspots appear, so that additional blocks can be inserted. The data
flow can also be broken at the hotspots. You will find a description of all insertable
function blocks in section 4.
Figure 52 shows a possible CANoe configuration in Online mode3, in which multiple
network nodes are provided in the simulation setup. A filter is inserted in the trace
branch, graphics branch and in the data branch so that only certain messages will be
displayed. The statistics branch and the bus statistics branch each receive all data,
while the logging branch is broken.

Note: The data flow in the measurement setup is always directional. It runs from
the left, starting at the connection symbol (connection to the simulation
setup) to the evaluation windows on the right.

3.2.2 Configuration of the Measurement Setup


Besides such functions as loading and saving configurations or associating CAN da-
tabases, which you call directly from items in the main menu, the data flow diagram
and the function blocks in the measurement setup window are used primarily in the
configuration of CANoe.

3
Data flow and functions in Online and Offline modes only differ in the data source and in the transmit
block. Refer to section 2.7.4 for a description of Offline mode.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


89

You configure the measurement setup by activating a block in the data flow diagram
(clicking it with the left mouse button or moving the selection frame with the <TAB> or
arrow keys). Clicking on the selected hotspot with the right mouse button or pressing
<F10> opens a popup menu with all configuration options.
For example, new function blocks such as filters or generator blocks can be inserted
at the black rectangular insertion points (hotspots) in the data flow, and the PC-card's
CAN controller can be configured from the PC-card icon at the far left in the meas-
urement setup.
To copy and move blocks there are the functions Copy and Cut in each block's po-
pup menu, as well as Paste in the popup menu for a hotspot.
If you wish to exclude a function block from the measurement, you can deactivate it
before the measurement with the spacebar or with the Node active line in the popup
menu. This is especially helpful if you have already configured a block and only want
to disable it for certain measurements without deleting it. Deactivated blocks are
shown as a different shape to differentiate them from active blocks. A node can be
reactivated by pressing the spacebar again or by selecting the same popup menu
line again.
A brief look at the measurement setup window gives an overview of the configuration
options provided by CANoe and shows you how your actual measurement configura-
tion appears ("Graphic menu").
The measurement setup can be displayed in two different modes:
• Automatically fitted to the window size.
• Fixed magnification with scroll bars if necessary.
You can select these modes from the measurement setup's popup menu. In fixed
magnification mode the dimensions of the measurement setup are preserved. If the
window is too small to show the entire measurement setup, you can scroll to the hid-
den area with the help of the scroll bars.

3.2.3 Working with Evaluation Blocks in the Measurement Setup


All evaluation blocks on the right side of the measurement setup are displayed above
one another. The standard evaluation blocks, Statistics and Bus Statistics, always
appear exactly once each. Other evaluation blocks (Trace, Data, Graphics and Log-
ging) appear at least once each.
To insert new evaluation blocks in the measurement setup, click the branch with the
right mouse button and select the new window from the popup menu. This places the
new block after the last block of the same type. It gets the standard name with a se-
rial number. The first Trace window is called Trace, the second gets the name Trace
2, etc.
As an alternative, you can insert evaluation blocks by opening the popup menu for
one of the evaluation blocks and selecting a new block there.
You can also delete the block from the measurement setup via its popup menu, pro-
vided that there is more than one evaluation block of that basic type in the measure-
ment setup. When the block is deleted, the entire branch is always deleted, including
all of the insertable evaluation blocks there.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


90

To open the window assigned to the evaluation block, double click the block with the
left mouse button or choose Show Window in the block's popup menu. Multiple win-
dows of the same type are shown cascaded in the standard layout.

3.2.4 Message Attributes


Messages that were not transmitted by CANoe's CAN PC-card (Receive messages),
get the attribute Rx and a time stamp from the card's clock when they are received.
Afterwards they are passed to CANoe via the card driver and, finally, they are shown
in the evaluation windows. The time stamp and Rx message attribute can be seen in
the Trace window.

time stamp

trace window


3.2000 sec
RX buffer of
the controller 3.2000 1 3FC Rx d 3 29 10 98

CAN-Bus

Figure 53: Receiving messages

The messages to be transmitted are passed from the simulation setup via the card
driver to the CAN PC-card. If your hardware supports the card and driver option
Activate TxRq in the Options item of the PC-card icon's popup menu, and you have
activated this, the driver returns the time of the transmit request assigned to the CAN
microcontroller to you. In the Trace window, for example, you would see the message
to be transmitted with the attribute TxRq.
After successful transmission the message is returned with the actual time of trans-
mission and the attribute Tx, so that the transmit messages can be displayed and/or
logged in the Trace window.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


91

CANoe transmit
branch

time stamp

trace window


2.7000 sec
Tx buffer of
the controller 2.7000 1 3FC TxRq d 3 29 10 98

trace window


2.7400 sec CAN-Bus
2.7400 1 3FC Tx d 3 29 10 98

Figure 54: Transmission of messages

The TxRq display permits measurements of the difference between the time of
transmit request and time of transmission. The time between the message with Tx
attribute and TxRq attribute is essentially the transmission time of a message, i.e. the
time that the CAN controller needs to place a message completely on the bus. It is a
function of baud rate and message length. The transmission time also grows as a
result of lost arbitration events, which can be observed more for low-priority mes-
sages at high bus loads.
Since the (very small) latency time of the card driver interrupt must be added to the
transmission time, the following general formula applies:
tTx - tTxRq = Transmission time + Latency time

Note: Under high load conditions the display of messages might be delayed in
the evaluation windows under some circumstances. However, the time
stamps for the messages remain unaffected by this, since they are already
assigned to the messages when they are received on the card.

3.2.5 Simulation Mode


At the beginning of the development process, the network is fully simulated. In this
phase you can operate CANoe with or without a physical bus. In the former case it is
sufficient to connect the card's two CAN controllers to the bus. In this case the oper-
ating mode in the simulation dialog (Main menu item Configuration│Simulation)
remains set to Real Bus. All messages generated in the simulation setup are then
placed on the real bus by the first chip. Here the second chip only serves as a sec-
ond bus station which permits the operation of a real bus.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


92

If you work without a real bus and real controllers, you can operate CANoe in pure
simulation mode. Switch the operating mode in the simulation dialog (Menu item
Configuration│Simulation...) from Real Bus to Simulated Bus. Bus access (sending
and receiving messages) is then simulated.
In simulation mode an animation factor can be specified. The (simulated) meas-
urement then appears slowed by this factor. Accordingly, the simulation is acceler-
ated for simulation factors between zero and one. (For example, if you specify the
value 0.1, the measurement would be accelerated by a factor of 10.)

The supplemental icons and appearing on the toolbar can be used to resume
the simulation for a defined period of time or to stop a running simulation at any point
in time. The length of the time step is set in the input box to the right of the icons; in-
put is in milliseconds.
Slave mode is a special simulation mode in which the time sequencing of the meas-
urement (time base) is controlled by an external program. A typical usage would be to
control the measurement by a master program which accesses the CANoe simulation
object via the COM.
CAPL Debugging enables the display of variables of CAPL nodes during a CANoe
simulation as well as stopping simulations by the use of CAPL commands.
This dialog allows settings for:
• Activating/deactivating the execution of the halt CAPL command.
(default: activated)
The execution of all halt commands within a CANoe configuration can be en-
abled/disabled.
• Activating/deactivating the display of the full path in the call stack
(default: deactivated)
You can select whether the call stack shows only the name of the CAPL node
or the full path.
• Activating/deactivating the execution of the inspect CAPL command
(default: activated)
The execution of all inspect commands within a CANoe configuration can be
enabled/disabled.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


93

Figure 55: Simulation Dialog

Note: If you are operating CANoe in simulation mode, i.e. without a physical bus,
the program emulates the functionality of the CAN chip on the interface
card. In this mode, the bus baud rate is the only system parameter you
would only configure in the card's configuration dialog. In this case, the
values of the other card parameters do not have any effect on program
execution. For small animation factors, a high baud rate might result in the
time resolution of the chip emulator being insufficient. You would then get
an error message, in which CANoe would inform you of the smallest feasi-
ble animation factor. To be able to continue to run a simulation in real time
(Animation factor 1) you could reduce the baud rate in the card's configu-
ration dialog. However, this will change other system properties such as
the latency times of certain messages under high bus loading.

If you are operating CANoe without a card please observe the instructions in the Ap-
pendix.

3.3 Trace Window


All messages arriving at the input of the Trace block are displayed as text lines in the
Trace window.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


94

Figure 56: Trace Window of CAN

The figure shows an example of a Trace window of CAN. Depending on the specific
CANoe option used, different columns are shown. The most important of these are
described in the following table.
If you have installed one of the following options, you can find more information in the
corresponding option’s manual or in the online help:
• CANoe.LIN resp. DENoe.LIN
• CANoe.FlexRay resp. DENoe.FlexRay
• CANoe.J1939

Exemplary definitions of the CAN bus columns:

Time Point in time when the information arrived at the CAN card (Receive, trans-
mit or transmit request). If the message was generated by a CAPL program,
the time set in the program is displayed. Output is in seconds from the start
of measurement.
Chn Number of the CAN controller chip which provided the message. Generally
the number 1 or 2 is output in this column. If the message was generated by
a CAPL program block, whereby the CAN number was not declared explicity,
the character C is output.
ID Identifier for the message. Representation is decimal or hexadecimal ac-
cording to the preselection. An X is appended to an extended identifier.
Name If a symbolic database is used the message names appear. The columns
"ID" and "Name" can also be shown as a combined column.
Dir Possible values here are:
RX = Receive, TX = Transmit or TXRQ = Transmit request
Attr Special messages are described by add-on attributes:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


95

WU = Wake up or TE = Transceiver error


DLC The DLC (Data length code) specifies the length of the CAN-data field in
bytes.
Data Listing of the message data bytes. Representation is decimal or hexadeci-
mal according to the preselection. If a Remote message is involved the text
"Remote Frame" appears in this field.

Besides these main columns, other configurable columns may exist depending on the
specific CANoe option.
A number of other events are output in the Trace window:
• Error frames:
When error frames occur a message will appear in the Trace window.
• Environment variables:
If the value of an environment variable changes, the time, name of the environ-
ment variable and new value are displayed. You can activate or deactivate the
display of environment variables in the configuration dialog for the Trace win-
dow.
The Trace Window offers several views which can either be placed freely – together
as one separate window – or be shown within the Trace Window (docked). There are
tabs to switch between the following different views:
• Detail view
(replaces the Trace-Watch-Window)
• Difference view
(for direct comparison of different events)
• Statistic view (on signal values)
(several events can be selected and examined statistically)
The offline filter provides supplementary filtering of the recorded messages in the
Trace Window. You can start this function with the Event filtered command in the
context menu of the Trace Window.

3.3.1 Standard Configuration of the Trace Window


To configure the Trace window, select the Trace block in the data flow diagram by
mouse or keyboard. Then choose the menu item Window configuration that ap-
pears, which opens a dialog box for configuring the window. Different display modes
are available.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


96

Figure 57: Configuring the Trace Block

chronological output mode


The arriving messages are shown sorted by time. When the list reaches the
window border it is scrolled, which can make it difficult to observe during fast
bus traffic.

chronological, cyclic update output mode


Here, the arriving messages are shown sorted by time, as in the chronological
mode. However, the Trace window is not updated with each message any
longer, but rather only cyclically with a time constant. This saves on computing
time during high bus loading, making bus observations possible on computers
with weaker performance in this mode.

fixed position output mode


Here messages are assigned to fixed lines. As they arrive, new messages
overwrite older messages of the same type on these lines. This mode has the
advantage that even fast bus traffic can be tracked in a user-friendly manner.
Furthermore, less computing time is required.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


97

fixed position, cyclic update output mode


Here fixed lines are assigned to the messages, as in the fixed position mode.
However, the Trace window is not updated with each message any longer, but
rather only cyclically with a time constant that can be configured. This saves on
computing time during high bus loading, making bus observations possible on
computers with weaker performance in this mode.
At any time you can switch back and forth between the two representations, even
during a measurement. Thus, the user can switch over to chronological output mode
after the measurement to page forward and backward through the received mes-
sages in the Trace window.

Note: The Trace window can be stopped by the toolbar icon during a meas-
urement run, so that you can analyze its contents in a user-friendly man-
ner without terminating the measurement.

Furthermore, the Trace window offers you two different time formats. You can select
whether the time stamp for messages should be displayed as absolute, i.e. in sec-
onds since the start of measurement, or relative to the message preceding it. In the
latter case, in fixed mode the time differences always refer to the same line. As a re-
sult, in this mode you can read off the transmission intervals between messages with
the same identifiers. In Chronological mode the time differences are always shown
referenced to the last message displayed in the window.
If you also wish to see changes of environment variables in the Trace window, you
must activate this by marking the relevant option.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


98

3.3.2 Configuration of Columns in the Trace Window


Depending on the CANoe option or purpose of the Trace window, it may be advisable
to show more or fewer columns. Therefore the Trace window offers a set of possible
columns that can be laid out in any desired way.

Figure 58: Columns Configuration in the Trace Window

A user-defined columns configuration is also possible as a standard. This means that


all new Trace windows you create with this CANoe version are created with these
same settings. Please refer to online Help for the exact procedure for configuring col-
umns and selecting individual configuration sets.

Note: Not all messages or events (e.g. environment variables) occurring in your
system will fill the same columns or all columns. For example, the "Desti-
nation" column is not filled out for a CAN message. However, a J1939
message will show its "Destination address" in this column.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


99

3.3.3 Trace Window Options from the Toolbar


The toolbar contains five buttons with which you can directly configure the Trace win-
dow4:
Delete Trace window
Update/Stop Trace window

Toggle Trace window mode: Chronological/Fixed position

Toggle Trace window mode for time representation: Absolute/relative

Toggle Trace window mode for messages: Symbolic/Numeric

Trace window mode for numbering format: Decimal/Hexadecimal

If you are working with multiple windows, the actions always act only on the active
Trace window. If another measurement window is active, when one of these buttons
is activated the window of the first Trace block is activated, and the function is exe-
cuted in this window. If you are only working with one Trace block, the action is exe-
cuted there directly without the window being activated.

3.3.4 Detail View (Trace Watch Functionality)


The Detail View replaces the former Trace Watch window and offers user-friendly
methods to further examine the contents of the Trace window after the end of a
measurement or in Pause mode.

3.3.5 Optimizing the Trace Window


Since the Trace display requires a lot of computing time, at high bus loading the data
might be displayed in a delayed manner. However, the messages will still have a cor-
rect time stamp that is already assigned to it by the PC-card. At high base load the
message buffer might overflow and messages could be lost. A warning is output in
the Write window. To prevent a buffer overflow when "Tracing along", it is recom-
mended that all unnecessary branches (Logging, Statistics window, etc.) be discon-
nected. At high bus load, switch the Trace window to the fixed mode to economize on
computing time (see also 2.5 regarding this).
In offline mode computer power plays a subordinate role. Here the trace branch can
always be active. An animate function is also available, with which the entire meas-
urement can be repeated in slow motion, and the entries can be tracked in the Trace
window.

4
The buttons for numbering format (hex/dec) and message format (numeric/symbolic) change the
associated options globally for the entire program.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


100

3.4 Graphic Window


The Graphics windows serve to display signal responses over time. As was the case
for the Data block, if a symbolic database is used you can have the values of signals
specified there displayed directly as physical variables. For example, the engine
speed response could be viewed in units of RPM or the temperature pattern over
time could be viewed in degrees Celsius.

Figure 59: Graphics window

Signal-time responses are displayed graphically in the Graphics window. They are
displayed in a X-Y diagram above the time axis. The measurement data remain in the
Graphics window after a measurement stop and can be examined using special
measurement cursors.
The Graphics window has a legend in which the selected signals are shown with their
value ranges and colors. It also has a toolbar from which you can easily call the most
important measurement functions. Both the legend and toolbar can be configured in
the window's popup menu and can be enabled or disabled from there.
In the Graphics window there is exactly one active signal identified by inverted font in
the legend. You can make a signal the active signal using the Tab key, by Page
Up/Down or by clicking the signal name with the mouse.
• If Single-signal mode is enabled, all commands - such as Measure, Zoom and
Scroll - refer to the active signal.
• In Multisignal mode the commands refer to all signals of the Graphics window.

Note: Besides displaying signals, the Graphics window also offers the option of
viewing the time responses of environment variables. You can configure
environment variables in the window's signal selection dialog by pressing
the [New EV...] button. All of the statements made below regarding signals
also apply, in principle, to environment variables.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


101

3.4.1 Selecting Signals


In the Graphics window's signal selection dialog you can - just like in the dialog for
the Data window - add signals, delete signals and enter display parameters for them.
Open the dialog from the popup menu of the Data/Graphics block in the measure-
ment setup, from the popup menu of the Graphics window, or by double clicking the
legend at the right of the window with the mouse.

Figure 60: Signal selection dialog in the Graphics window

All Graphics window signals are displayed in the list box at the upper left of the dia-
log. With the [New Signal ...] button you first open a list for selecting CAN mes-
sages. In a second list you can then import the signals from the message you initially
selected into the Graphics window.
Pressing the [Delete] button removes the highlighted signals from the list. With
[Define...] you can define a signal, if you wish to display it without using the data-
base. The [Edit...] button allows you to modify an existing signal description.
In the text input box Short name you enter a short, descriptive name for the signal,
which is then output as the signal name in the Graphics window legend.
The display modes physical and decimal are available to you. In the physical display
mode the raw data are extracted from the CAN message, scaled with the (linear)
conversion formula, and displayed as physical values in the Graphics window. The
necessary signal data are obtained from the database. In the decimal display mode,
on the other hand, the raw data are only extracted from the CAN message and dis-
played as decimal numbers. There is no scaling by a conversion formula.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


102

3.4.2 Arrangement of Signals


To exclude certain configured signals from the next measurement, you can deactivate
them before the measurement. To do this, select the desired signal from the legend.
Then in its popup menu choose the function Deactivate. You can also reactivate any
deactivated signal from the same place.
Moreover, you can also change the sequence of signal entries in the legend of the
Graphics window. This is useful if you have configured a rather large number of sig-
nals, but the window is too small to show them all in the legend. Additionally, you can
move the deactivated signals to the lower border so that you can still see as many of
the active signals in the legend as possible, even with relatively small window dimen-
sions.
To move a signal entry you would select it with the mouse and choose the desired
direction from the popup menu or by the key combination <Alt+Arrow up> or
<Alt+Arrow down>.

3.4.3 Signal Layout


The signal layout for signals shown in the Graphics window can be controlled by a
number of functions. You can set basic options in the Graphics Window Options
dialog, which is opened from the window's popup menu or by double clicking the win-
dow with the right mouse button. All functions used to arrange the signals in the win-
dow or to study them after the end of the measurement are opened from the Graph-
ics window's popup menu or the toolbar and are described in the next section.

Figure 61: Configuring the axes in the Graphics window

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


103

For all signals you have entered in the Graphics window's signal configuration dialog,
values are automatically assigned for Y-scaling, signal color and time axis, as well as
the lines type. The values for Y-scaling and lines type are assumed from the data-
base. In the Graphics window's Options dialog you can configure all of the options to
satisfy your work requirements. The dialog consists of two parts, the axes options
and the measurement options. You can toggle between the two parts with the action
buttons Measurement > and < Axes.
Listed in the dialog's signal list are all those signals which were entered in the signal
selection dialog.

3.4.3.1 Line Types


The line type in the last column identifies the display type for the display of a signal
curve.
With Line the measurement points are connected by a line. This representation re-
sults in a continuous curve. It is the default option for displaying physical signals that
are at least one byte in length.
With the Steps option, after a measurement point a horizontal line is output to the
time of the next measurement point and from there a vertical line to the measurement
point. This display type is especially suitable for digital signals. Steps is the default
option for signals that are less than 8 bits in length.
With the Horizontal option, after a measurement point a horizontal line is output up
to the time of the next measurement point. With Dots only the measurement points
are marked.

3.4.3.2 Display Modes


Beneath the signal list you will find four input boxes for configuring the time axis. With
Output you can define the display mode.
If multiple measurement points fall together within the time range of a single screen
pixel, then in Pixel mode only measurement points at the borders of this range are
displayed. This leads to faster output if there are many measurement points in a
small space. Under some circumstances, however, individual peaks might not be
shown in the signal response, if the measurement point with the extreme value lies
within this range. In Full mode, all measurement points are output even if they lie
within the time range of the same screen pixel at the active scaling. When there are
many measurement points in a small space, this will lead to a lower output speed, but
all extreme values of the signal response will be displayed.
The output mode setting has no influence whatsoever on measurement value acqui-
sition.

3.4.4 Configuration of the Measurement


You can access the Graphics Window Options dialog by activating the
[Measurement] button from the window layout dialog. Here you can configure the
behavior of the Graphics window during the measurement.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


104

Figure 62: Measurement Options in the Graphics Window

If you select the option Do not change axis options under Actions at measurement
start, then the last configured Graphics window setup is assumed at the start of the
measurement. Set with time axis sets the Graphics window - at the measurement
start - to a time range selected by you. Also, with Set time axis and home
configuration at the measurement start you can set the Y-axis range you had previ-
ously defined in the popup menu with Save home configuration.
If you check the option Fit time axis under Actions at end of measurement, the
signal responses over the entire measurement duration are displayed at the end of
the measurement. Otherwise, the displayed time interval remains on the screen at
the end of the measurement.

3.4.5 Measurement and Display Functions


You can call measurement and display functions of the Graphics window, either from
the popup menu or by activating the appropriate toolbar button. From the popup
menu you can decide whether you wish to have the toolbar shown in the Graphics
window or in the main window.

3.4.6 Signal Modes


You can activate single-signal mode from the popup menu with the Single function.
In single-signal mode, functions such as Zoom-in, Zoom-out, Home configuration
and Fit only act on the active signal of the Graphics window, which you select by
clicking in the legend with the mouse. In multisignal mode (All function) the same
functions act on all signals of the active Graphics window. Inverted output of the
name of the active signal in the legend is disabled.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


105

Note: It is always the case that either single-signal mode or multisignal mode is
active. The operations that change time axis scaling are always executed
for all signals - regardless of the setting single-signal / multisignal mode -
since there is only one time axis for all signals in the Graphics window.

3.4.7 Measurement Modes

Measurement Mode "Point"


You can activate point measurement mode in the Graphics window with the func-
tion Measurement cursor from the popup menu or by the appropriate toolbar button.
If this mode is already active, it is deactivated by selecting the function again.
A measurement cursor (vertical line in the window) is displayed, which you can posi-
tion by clicking and holding down the left mouse button. If the mouse pointer is lo-
cated above the measurement cursor, it changes its form to a horizontal double ar-
row. If the mouse button is pressed at a point not located above the measurement
cursor, a rectangle is dragged open when the mouse is dragged. The contents of this
rectangle is then displayed magnified when the mouse button is released (Zoom
function). You can also move the measurement cursor by keyboard with the key
combinations <Shift-Arrow left> and <Shift-Arrow right>.
While the mouse button is held down a small square is visible which highlights the
next closest measurement value. The measurement time, signal name and value are
shown in the upper legend for this measurement point. In the legend with signal
names, the signal values of all signals are displayed for this particular time point. The
measurement cursor considers Single-Signal or Multisignal mode. In Single-Signal
mode the small box only jumps to measurement points of the active signal; in Mul-
tisignal mode the box jumps to the next closest measurement point of all signals.

Measurement Mode "Difference"


To evaluate the in measurement value differences between two points in time, you
use the difference measurement mode, which you activate by the Difference
markers item from the popup menu or by the appropriate toolbar button.
The measurement cursor and a difference cursor (vertical lines in the window) are
displayed. If Difference mode is enabled, the cursors are shown at their active posi-
tions if they lie within the visible screen area. Otherwise they are moved to the view-
ing area. By clicking and holding the left mouse button you can position the cursors. If
the mouse pointer is located above a cursor, it changes its form to a horizontal dou-
ble arrow. If the mouse button is pressed at a point not located above the cursors, a
rectangle is dragged open when the mouse is dragged. The contents of the rectangle
are then displayed magnified when the mouse button is released (Zoom function).
The cursors can only be positioned within the viewing area. However, the viewing
area can be shifted by the arrow keys.
You can also move the measurement cursors by keyboard with the key combinations
<Ctrl-Arrow left> and <Ctrl-Arrow right>.
While the key is pressed a small square is visible, which highlights the next closest
measurement value. The measurement time, signal name and absolute value (not

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


106

the difference) of this measurement point are shown in the upper legend. In the leg-
end with signal names, the differences in signal values for all signals are shown for
the time points that have been set. The two time points and the time difference are
also displayed. The measurement cursor considers the option Single-Signal or Mul-
tisignal mode. In Single-Signal mode the small box only jumps to measurement
points of the active signal; in Multisignal mode the box jumps to the next closest
measurement point of all signals.

3.4.8 Display Modes


Three different display modes are available to you for layout functions such as
Zoom-in, Zoom-out, Home configuration or Fit:
In X-mode the functions Zoom-in, Zoom-out, Home configuration and Fit only act
on the time axis (X-axis) of the signals. In Y-mode the same functions act only on the
values axis (Y-axis), while in XY-mode they act simultaneously on both axes.

3.4.9 Layout Functions


The Graphics window provides you with a number of functions for changing the win-
dow layout. Some of the functions available to you via the popup menu include:

Fit all
Independent of the preset mode, the signals are scaled such that they are com-
pletely visible. To do this, the program determines the actual minimum and
maximum values for each signal and the time range of all signals, and scaling is
adjusted accordingly.

Zoom-in/Zoom-out
This command magnifies or reduces, by a factor of 2, either the active signal (in
Single-Signal mode) or all signals (in Multisignal mode). The size is changed
according to the preselected axis mode, either for only one axis (in X-mode or
Y-mode) or for both axes simultaneously (in X/Y-mode).
Operations that change the scaling of the time axis are always executed for all
signals (independent of the option Single-Signal/Multisignal mode), since there
is only one time axis for all signals in the Graphics window. Axes can also be
scaled individually for each signal in the Graphics window's options dialog.

Fit
The signals are scaled such that they are completely visible. This involves de-
termining the actual minimum and maximum values of each signal as well as
the time range for all signals, and the scaling is set accordingly. The active
modes (X-mode, Y-mode or X/Y-mode, and Single-Signal or Multisignal mode)
are taken into consideration. This fits the entire graphic optimally in the window.

Round
Scaling of the displayed value range for all signals is rounded-off. This involves
rounding-off the active Division value to a valid whole number (Division = n *

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


107

10x , n = [1 to 9], x = whole number). The lower and upper range limits are
rounded-off to the precision of the Division value.
Rounding always affects all signals of the Graphics window. The active mode
(X-mode, Y-mode or XY-mode) is considered. Scaling of the signals is rounded-
off to a whole number value.

Get scalings/Store scalings


You can save the scaling configuration of the Graphics window (i.e. the time
range displayed for all signals and the value ranges of each individual signal) as
a home configuration. The default home configuration has a time range from 0
to 5 seconds and the Min/Max value range of each signal taken from the data-
base.
With the function Store scalings the current scaling of the active Graphics win-
dow is saved. In doing so, the active modes are considered (X-mode, Y-mode
or XY-mode, and Single-Signal or Multisignal mode). Afterwards, you can reset
all scalings in the Graphics window to this stored configuration at any time with
the function Get Scalings.

Marker
This command activates or deactivates measurement point marking. The color
of the measurement points matches the preset signal color.

Grid
This command enables/disables grid lines in the Graphics window. The grid
lines match the subdivisions of the Y-axis. You can set the color of the grid lines
in the Color Options dialog.

Y-Axis
This command enables/disables labeling of the Y-axis in the active Graphics
window.
When labeling is disabled, a Y-axis with 10 subdivisions is displayed for all sig-
nals. In the legend the following are shown for each signal: Lower and upper
values of the viewing area, and the value amount between any two subdivision
tick marks.
If labeling is enabled, the subdivision of the Y-axis is calculated automatically for
the active signal and is displayed in the color of the signal.
The tick marks are set to whole number values. If a signal is shown as decimal
(i.e. raw signal values without conversion), then only whole numbers are dis-
played. In this case, if an area between two adjacent numbers is shown magni-
fied, no subdivision tick marks will be seen any longer along the Y-axis. For the
physical display type subdivisions less than 1 are also shown.
When labeling is enabled the legend also shows the following for each signal:
Lower and upper values of the viewing area (i.e. not necessarily the values of
the lowermost and uppermost Y-axis tick marks) and the value amount between
any two tick marks.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


108

The grid lines in the graphics display always match the tick marks on the Y-axis.
Grid lines are enabled or disabled by the Grid command in the window's popup
menu.

Colors
Here you select the background color for the window (white or black). Further-
more, you can open the Options dialog for configuring signal colors.

Signal Legend
With this function you choose whether the legend for signals should be dis-
played on the left side of the Graphics window or not.

3.4.10 Export of Signals


With the help of this function you can save the data of one or all signals of the Graph-
ics window to a file. Depending on the activated signal mode (i.e. single-signal or
multisignal mode) the Export either applies to the currently active signal or to all sig-
nals. This function is only available if data exist for the active signal.
CSV format (Comma Separated Values Format) is supported for export. Possible
delimiter symbols are comma, semicolon, tab [TAB] and space [SPACE].

3.4.11 Toolbar of the Graphics Window


The graphics popup menu offers you the option of showing the graphics toolbar ei-
ther in the main window or in the graphics windows. If you have the graphics toolbar
shown in the main window, the functions act on the active graphics window. If no
Graphics window is active, the graphics toolbar is deactivated. Click a graphics win-
dow with the mouse to activate it.

3.4.12 Optimization of the Graphics Window


The Graphics window is a very powerful but equally complex window in the meas-
urement setup. Its performance capabilities are closely interrelated to the graphics
card of your computer and the graphics driver installed. Under certain conditions ef-
fects may occur that disturb the graphics display when working with the window.
Generally these unpleasant effects in the display can be eliminated if you have Win-
dows redraw the window, for example by modifying the size of the window.

Note: Please make sure that the Graphics window is not covered up by other
measurement windows, menus or dialogs during the measurement. Under
some circumstances the performance capabilities of the output may be
impaired severely by such overlapping.

Depending on the configuration and bus load the powerful symbol algorithms used in
the Graphics window may place a relatively high demand on computer resources.
Since individual requirements vary widely, the Graphics window provides special con-
figuration options for optimizing the display.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


109

To optimize the Graphics window, open the Options configuration dialog from the
popup menu or the window's toolbar. After pressing the [Measurement] button you
will be presented with the measurement options, where you can optimize the follow-
ing Parameters of the Graphics window:

Buffer size
Here you set the time interval that is to be saved (in seconds) for the signal re-
sponses of all signals configured in the Graphics window. For example, if you
enter the value 10 here, the last 10 seconds of your measurement in the Graph-
ics window are always saved and will be available to you after the end of meas-
urement for further evaluation. Consequently, high values for this parameter will
- particularly when displaying many signals - result in a large memory require-
ment, but will allow you to track and evaluate the signal response over a corre-
spondingly large time period after the end of measurement.
After the measurement stop, with large signal buffers some functions may be-
come lethargic, such as moving or fitting signals, since in this case large quanti-
ties of data must be redrawn. Therefore, you should select a value for the buffer
size that is as small as possible.

Buffer limit
In addition to buffer size, you can also specify a buffer limit in kB. This defines
the maximum memory usage by the Graphics window during the measurement.
Above all, this is advisable if you have specified a relatively large time span as
the buffer size. Without this maximum limit, more and more memory is de-
manded by the operating system over the course of the measurement. This can
lead to severe loading of the overall system due to swapping out of storage.
Please refer to online Help for further details.

User-defined refresh
Here you define how often the Graphics window display should be updated.
Small values result in continuous display of the signal response, but on the
other hand they place a high demand on computing resources and may lead to
performance problems with slower computers. High refresh values lessen the
demand on computing resources, particular when many signals are being dis-
played, but they lead to more erratic display of signal responses. You should
only input a refresh value if your measurement setup places special demands
(high bus load, simultaneous display of many signals, etc.) on the Graphics
window. If the Refresh check box is not checked, the Graphics window auto-
matically determines a favorable default value. As long as no load problems are
occurring during the measurement you should not modify these options.

Scrolling
If the signal curves run into the right border of the Graphics window after the
start of measurement, this command will result in automatic tracking of the
curves. This involves shifting the time axis to the left, to make room for the
measurement signal on the right side. You can configure this behavior, referred
to as scrolling, in the Graphics window. Continuous scrolling is activated as a

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


110

default, whereby the time axis is only shifted minimally to the left to give the im-
pression of continuously flowing signal curves.
To shift the time axis in jumps, thus maintaining the graphic diagram at a fixed
location between these jumps, you would deactivate the autoscroll mode in the
Graphics Window Settings dialog. In the line below this you can set the per-
centage of the displayed time interval by which the time axis should be shifted.
The smaller the value, the more evenly the view is scrolled, but it is shifted more
frequently. If the time interval displayed in the Graphics window is smaller than
the value you specified, the entire Graphics window is reconstructed, i.e. the
image is shifted by 100%. This prevents the Graphics window from demanding
too much computing power due to frequent scrolling for very short time inter-
vals.
The scrolling procedure always demands more computer resources for smaller
time intervals, since scrolling must be done more quickly. Therefore, there is a
minimum refresh rate for updating the window contents. If the displayed time in-
terval is of the same order of magnitude as this rate, the signal curves are dis-
played again in an increasingly jumpy manner, since the window contents are
not always updated. You can set the minimum refresh rate in the project file
CAN.INI. This involves setting the following value in the [System] section:
GraphicWindowMinAutoRefreshrate= <Cycle time in ms>
However, please note that the smaller the value you select, the more system
loading will increase. Before modifying the automatic refresh rate, it is therefore
essential that you determine an optimal refresh rate with the help of the User-
Defined Refresh function.

Note: Some driver-specific problems in displaying the measurement cursors and


dotted lines, such as those used to draw extrapolated signals and window
grid lines, can be resolved by special options in the file CAN.INI. Refer to
documentation in section [Debug] of the project file regarding this.

3.5 Write Window


The Write window has two functions in CANoe: First, important system messages on
the progress of the measurement are output here (e.g. start and stop times of the
measurement, preset baud rate, triggering of the logging function, statistics report
after the conclusion of measurement). Secondly, all messages which you, as the
user, place in CAPL programs with the function write() are output here.
The Write window offers several Views which can either be placed freely – together
as one separate window – or be shown within the Write window (docked). There are
tabs to switch between the following different views:
• All (shows all messages)
• System
• CAPL
• Inspect
• Call stack

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


111

The popup menu command Copy contents to Clipboard accepts the contents of the
Write window in the clipboard. Write window messages serve as both a supplemental
report for your measurements and – should problems occur – as a basis for error
analysis by our customer service.
You can find a description of the most important CANoe system messages that are
output to the Write window in the online help.

3.6 The Data Window


Data windows serve to display signal values. Signals are understood to be data seg-
ments of a message which carry specific information (e.g. engine RPM for CAN
buses in motor vehicles). In the Data window you can view signals in a user-friendly
manner. When a symbolic database is used the values of the signals specified there
can even be displayed as physical variables. For example, engine RPM can be
viewed in revolutions per minute, or temperature in degrees Celsius.

Figure 63: Data Window

Always displayed are the signal name - which can be set in the configuration dialog -
and its associated value. You can also decide whether the value should be displayed
as a raw datum (hexadecimal or decimal), as a physical value with accompanying
unit of measurement, or as a bar chart.
The signal names and values displayed in the window are context-sensitive. When
the mouse pointer is moved over them, the element below the pointer is identified by
a frame. This element can be dragged to any window location with the mouse, allow-
ing you to group signals and values according to your needs.

3.6.1 Configuration of Signals


From the popup menu of any data block or window, a configuration dialog can be
opened in which you can enter the signals that should be displayed in the particular
window, add or delete signals, or set their representation parameters.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


112

Figure 64: Data Window Configuration

All signals of the signal list are shown in the list box at the upper left of the dialog.
Here you can accept new signals from the associated database. When copying, the
abbreviated signal name is modified such that no ambiguities result. The abbreviated
name appears during the measurement as the signal identifier in addition to the ac-
tual signal value.
With the [Define] and [Edit] buttons you can enter a new signal description - inde-
pendent of the database - in the Data window or modify an existing signal descrip-
tion.

3.6.2 Display Types


Signal values can be displayed in the Data window in the modes shown below. The
output width of the signal value is automatically calculated from the bit length and
conversion formula. CANoe takes the necessary signal data from the database:

Physical
The raw data are extracted from the CAN message, scaled by the (linear) con-
version formula, and displayed as decimal fixed point numbers.
Example: Signal T consists of 5 bits, is unsigned, has a factor of 10 and an off-
set of 0. Then the possible raw value range is 0-31, and the physical value
range is 0-310. Therefore, the necessary output width is 3 characters.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


113

Display type: Decimal


The raw data are extracted from the CAN message and displayed as decimal
numbers.
Example: Signal T consists of 5 bits and is unsigned. Consequently, the possi-
ble raw value range is 0-31, and the necessary output width is 2 characters.

Display type: Hexadecimal


The raw data are extracted from the CAN message and are displayed as hexa-
decimal numbers.
Example: Signal T consists of 8 bits. The possible raw value range is then 0-
255, or in hexadecimal representation 0-FF. The necessary output width is
therefore 2 characters.

Display type: Bit


The raw data are extracted from the CAN message and displayed as binary
numbers.
Example: Signal T consists of 8 bits. The necessary output width is also 8, since
all bits are shown individually.

Display type: Bars


The physical signal value is displayed in the form of an analog bar. The follow-
ing parameters must be configured for the display:
Min, Max: Minimum and maximum signal values to be displayed by the bars.
Width: Size of the bar that is displayed. The unit corresponds to the width of one
character in the Data window.
Center: This defines the zero position of the bar.
With the help of parameters Min, Max and Center, it is possible to display just a
section of the signal's value range. For example, this could be the working point
of a signal to be monitored.

Display type: C-Style


You should only select this option if you are familiar with the programming lan-
guage C or C++. In the dialog's format input box you would enter a format string
that is used to display signal values in the Data window.
The signal's raw data (without conversion formula) are extracted from the CAN
message, converted to a 32 bit value, and output with the help of the
sprintf() C function:
sprintf(buffer, FORMATSTRING, (unsigned long)SIGNALVALUE)
The format string is compatible with the printf() format string of C. Due to
the transformation to unsigned long an L-modifier must always be entered.
Legal interpretations are "lx", "lX", "ld", "f" and "F". You can also use width and
precision modifiers.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


114

Examples of format strings: %5.2f, %8lx, %-3ld


The Data block attempts to recognize width specifiers in the format string to de-
termine the output width for the screen. If this is not possible, the maximum
width is assumed. This does not influence the output in the Data window.
Please note that invalid format strings can lead to unpredictable results as seri-
ous as system crashes. As a user you are fully responsible for the validity of the
format string!

3.6.3 Activity Indicator


The signal values of the last message received in the Data block remain visible in the
Data window until they are overwritten by new values. With signal values that change
slowly, the user can determine whether the signal was updated with the same value
or whether the particular message was not transmitted any longer and consequently
an older signal value is being displayed in the Data window. This information is pro-
vided by the Data window's activity indicator: If a message is received and recorded
with an unchanged signal value an alternating slash (‘/’ or ‘\’) appears after the value.
If the slash is not displayed, this means that the displayed constant signal value is not
current, since the particular message was not received.

3.6.4 Peak Indicator


With signal values that change very quickly over time, transient minima and maxima
can easily be overlooked. To make these transient peaks visible, the Data window
therefore has a peak display. This allows you to recognize very short signal fluctua-
tions as "afterglows" in the bar-type display. You configure the "afterglow duration" in
the Configure Timers dialog, which is called from the Data window's popup menu.
With the Peaks option box you can configure - in the Data window - whether mini-
mum and maximum values should be displayed in addition to the active value. If the
active signal value is greater than the previous maximum, the maximum is updated
immediately to the new value. It is not reset to the active value until after a specific
time interval. The same principle applies to the minimum.
The minimum and maximum values are only shown in bar-type displays. With all
other display types only the screen color changes when the minimum or maximum
value deviates from the active value.

3.6.5 Optimization of Data Display


From the Data window's popup menu you can open a dialog for configuring the dis-
play's time behavior during the measurement.
In the lower area of the dialog are option buttons used to enhance the performance
of the Data window for large quantities of data. In the normal case you should have
the default option Refresh Immediately activated. In this case the Data window out-
put is updated after a message is received. Additionally, the window is redrawn cycli-
cally every 2 seconds.
To permit the processing of large quantities of data you should activate the option
Only Refresh Cyclically. This results in the window only being updated cyclically. If
there are high message rates, this can lead to a significant reduction of system load-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


115

ing. However, to obtain reasonable outputs in the Data window you should not select
a cycle time greater than 500 ms.

3.7 Statistics Window


The Statistics block fulfills three different functions. One of these is to display the
average time between the sending of messages (secs/msg) during a measurement.
It can also display the messages per second. These are done by constructing a con-
tinuously updated line histogram above a message identifier’s axis. A sliding scale
averaging method with an adjustable averaging time is used. The other function
keeps statistics on all bus activities in the background; these results can be reported
either as a statistical report in the Write window or stored via a histogram function
and then processed further.

Figure 65: Statistics Window

The Statistics window displays (see Figure 65) the mean message rates existing at
the end of the measurement. The Write window contains the statistics report (see
Figure 67).

3.7.1 Direct Display in the Statistics Window


During the measurement either the mean transmit interval or the mean message rate
is displayed in the Statistics window. Smoothed averaging is used with adjustable
averaging time. The message identifiers are output on the horizontal axis, and the
corresponding rates on the vertical axis. The IDs are distributed according to whether
they originated from controller CAN1 or CAN2, and by message attributes Rx and Tx:

Rx Tx
CAN1 RED BLUE
CAN2 RED BLUE

In the statistics configuration dialog you can define whether the window diagram
should show the mean transmit interval (sec/msg) or its inverse, the mean message
rate (msg/sec). Also configurable is the averaging time which defines the time inter-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


116

val at which the display is refreshed. Averaging is most precise with a low value, but
this demands a lot of computing time. With high values the statistics display lags be-
hind. An averaging time of approx. 1000 ms gives satisfactory results for standard
applications.

Figure 66: Configuration of the Statistics Block

In standard mode the messages of the channels are displayed side by side. In tab
view mode the window is split. In the left part (standard view) the messages are
shown. In the right part (special view) special events are shown, e.g. error frames.
With the tabs on the bottom of the window you can switch between the buses. You
can have up to 3 standard views but only one special view for each bus channel.
You can scale the Statistics window from the popup menu. The functions available for
this, such as Zoom, Fit, Basic Image and Manual Scaling are described in detail in
online Help.

Note: If the CAN card used supports extended identifiers, the function Basic
Image is split. The user can choose whether scaling will be over the range
of standard identifiers or over the entire range.

3.7.2 Statistics Report


In background, statistics are kept on all bus actions, and the results can be reported
to the Write window after conclusion of the measurement. A list is constructed (sorted
by message identifiers) which contains information organized separately for receive
messages, transmit messages, transmit requests and transmit delays: Number of
messages, mean time spacing, standard deviation, minimum spacing, maximum
spacing.
When you select the option Activate under Expanded statistical functions in the
statistics configuration dialog all data will be accumulated for the report. However,
this of course requires computer resources and can slow down very fast bus traffic.
You can output the statistics report to the Write window either automatically or via the
menu entry Display statistics report after the end of a measurement.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


117

Figure 67: Statistical evaluation of a measurement in the statistics report

Afterwards, the Write window shows - for each occurring ID coded by attributes - the
total number of messages, the mean transmit interval, its standard deviation, mini-
mum and maximum.

Note: The function Display statistics report can only be selected if the Statistic
report activate option was selected during the measurement.

3.7.3 Choosing a Histogram


When the upgraded statistics functions are activated, data is collected for interpreta-
tion during measurement runtime. Several time periods for collecting data can be
recorded via the histogram function. The beginning and end of these time periods
can be determined from New evaluation and Stop evaluation in the popup menu of
the Statistics block or with appropriate CAPL functions.

Note: Stopping the measurement also ends data gathering for the time range
being measured at the time. Evaluations can be recorded from several
measurements started one after the other in the same configuration.

The data obtained can be further evaluated with the histogram dialog box (menu item
Evaluation output) by choosing regions of interest from the data included in the time
range.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


118

Figure 68: Histogram selection

The appropriate data selected can be stored as a CSV file (values separated by
commas) or transferred to Excel with the script toExcel.js. The data can also be ma-
nipulated with the user’s own Java or Visual Basic script.
The collected data can be reseted in the configuration dialog box of the statistics
block.

Note: Changing the configuration deletes all recorded ranges of coverage.

3.8 Bus Statistics Window


CANoe acquires statistical data over all CAN channels used. The data acquired de-
pend on the hardware used. The results are displayed in the Bus Statistics window.
The statistical functions include the rates and number of Data and Remote frames
(11 and 29 bit), Error frames and Overload frames. Also displayed are the values for
momentary and maximum bus load. The state of the CAN controller is shown as
ACTIVE, ERROR PASSIVE or BUS OFF. Also displayed for certain hardware plat-
forms are the value of the CAN controller's Tx error counter and Rx error counter.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


119

Figure 69: Bus Statistics Window

Note: If you have installed CANoe.LIN you can find additional information for the
shown statistic data in the manual’s chapter Option LIN or in the online
help.

Under Options in the card icon's popup menu in the measurement setup window, the
user can configure the time interval at which the card passes bus statistics
information to CANoe. This interval defines the frequency of the bus load measure-
ment and thereby also the averaging time. The default value is one second. For
measurements with extreme data throughput bus statistics may be deactivated to
increase performance. Above all, this affects the FIFO buffer between CANoe and
the CAN card. The error message "Rx buffer overrun" could possibly be prevented by
doing this.
Bus statistics information is also recorded in logging (cf. section 2.7). To include this
information in logging activate the Log internal events check box in the configura-
tion dialog for the log file. When the file is played back in Offline mode this informa-
tion is then displayed again in the Bus Statistics window. The Bus Statistics window
remains empty in Offline mode if the data source does not contain any bus statistics
information.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


120

4 Blocks and Filter


In the measurement setup there are square points (hotspots) between the basic func-
tion blocks, at which additional function blocks can be inserted or the data flow can
be blocked. The hotspots themselves allow all data to pass unhindered.
When a hotspot is clicked on with the right mouse button (or selected with the cursor
keys and then activated with <F10>), a popup menu appears with the following menu
commands:

If one of the first seven menu commands is clicked on, a block is inserted in the data
flow plan which satisfies the particular function. New hotspots appear before and after
this block, so that additional blocks can be inserted. The last menu item is a special
case. If it is activated a broken hotspot appears, which is intended to show that the
flow of information is blocked at this point.
Function blocks can be recognized by their appearance or by their labels in the data
flow chart. A P stands for a CAPL node (Program block), PF and SF designate the
Pass and Stop Filters, PE and SE are the corresponding filters for environment vari-
ables, a G refers to a Generator block, an IG to the Interactive Generator block and R
stands for a Replay block. The channel filter is represented with a special icon.
All blocks have popup menus which the user can open by either clicking with the right
mouse button or by selecting the block in the data flow plan and then pressing <F10>
. The first menu item opens a configuration dialog for the particular block, which only
serves to parameterize the block (there are two configuration dialogs for the genera-
tor block, which can be opened by the first two menu items). By selecting the last
item in the popup menu Delete this node, you can remove the block from the data
flow plan. All configuration information is lost in the process. However, the CAPL
source files of the CAPL node and the log file of the replay block are not deleted.
From the popup menu you can assign a comment to each function block and analysis
block. The comment is displayed by default. With the function Show comment in the
popup menu you can enable and disable the display separately for each block.
Please note that the size of the displayed comment depends on the actual position of
the function block and the space available for the display. Independent of this, it is
always the case that only the first two lines of the comments are displayed. It is ad-
visable to use only short key words in the first two lines and to enter more elaborate
information further below in the text.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


121

If you have not entered any comment, but the display is nevertheless activated, the
predefined comment is displayed.
In the simulation setup the user can insert function blocks directly by means of the
bus image. When you click the bus image with the right mouse button (or select it
with cursor keys followed by <F10>), a popup menu appears with the following menu
commands for inserting function blocks:

The following table gives you an overview where in the dataflow the function blocks
should be practically inserted.

Function block Type Symbol Reasonable place of use


Generator block Data source G /Simulation setup
Interactive Data source IG Simulation setup/Measurement
Generator block setup
Replay block Data source R Simulation setup
Stop filter Data sink SF Measurement setup
Pass filter Data sink PF Measurement setup
Channel filter Data sink -- Measurement setup
CAPL-Program Data source/sink P Simulation setup/Measurement
setup
EV Pass filter Data sink PE Measurement setup
EV Stop filter Data sink SE Measurement setup
*
Network node block Data source Prog Simulation setup

4.1 Generator Block


The purpose of the generator block is to create messages for transmission. Trigger
conditions and a transmit list are defined for this purpose. A received message, a key
press or a time period can be entered as a trigger condition. The trigger conditions
can also be used in combination. In the transmit list, messages (and error frames)
are entered in the sequence in which they are to be transmitted.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


122

Whenever a trigger condition occurs the next message is transmitted. When the end
of the list is reached, transmission may resume at the start of the list, depending on
the configuration.
Since generator blocks can be configured to be very elaborate, the popup menu of-
fers you the option of saving a generator block as a file and later reloading it, possibly
from a different configuration. As a result, you can easily exchange generator blocks
between different configurations.
Generator blocks are displayed in the data flow diagram as little blocks with the in-
scription G.

Figure 70: Generator Block Configuration - Triggering

4.1.1 Configuration of Triggering


In the popup menu select the item Triggering to define a trigger condition for trans-
mission of messages.
You can select one or more of the three possible conditions by marking the appropri-
ate check box(es):
• with On Message you indicate which identifier should trigger transmission, and
the delay that should occur.
• with On Key you indicate the key that should trigger
• with On Period you enter the period in milliseconds.
In the line Flow you define whether the transmit list should be run through exactly
once or cyclically.

4.1.2 Configuration of Transmit List


In the popup menu select the item Transmit list or double click the generator block
to create the list of messages to be transmitted:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


123

Figure 71: Generator block Configuration of Transmit list

When one of the trigger conditions occurs, the next element of this list is transmitted.
When the end of the list is reached the program resumes with the first element if the
run mode has been set to cyclic. The list may also consist of only one element.
Nine lines are displayed in the dialog box. The active line - to which the dialog but-
tons refer - is identified by the " " symbol at the beginning of the line. The active line
is shifted automatically by activating the <TAB> key or by clicking the dialog entry
boxes with the mouse.
Each line of the list consists of 11 columns. In the first column you enter the desired
identifier. The DLC field defines the number of data bytes in the message. After that
come the fields for data bytes. Only the number of bytes specified by the DLC are
accepted. The rest are ignored. The last column is a combination box for selecting
the controller by which the message is to be transmitted.

4.1.3 Entry of Signal Values


You can configure the generator block symbolically, provided that you are working
with a database. Use the option button [Symbol...] to select a message from the da-
tabase which is to be transmitted from the generator block.
Then the physical signal values of the message can be defined with the [Signal...]
button.
Displayed in the signal value input dialog are the individual signals of the message
that was on the active line of the transmit list. If the message only contains standard
signals, the signal list consists of three columns. The individual signals are listed in
the lines. In the last column you can prescribe a signal value. If you have assigned a

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


124

value table to the signal in the database, you can use the relevant symbolic descrip-
tor instead of a numeric value. You can select this from the signal value table in the
middle column.
Physical dimensions are stored in discrete form in the CAN messages. However, it
may not always be possible to represent the numeric value entered in the Value box
as a discrete value. In such cases, when exiting the line or activating the [OK] button,
the two next possible physical values are displayed in a dialog. Then the entered va-
lue is rounded to the next possible closest value.
Example:
The signal EngineData.RPM is defined as a 16 bit unsigned with an offset of 0
and a factor of 10. If the value to be compared is entered as 1015, the raw
value would have to be 1015/10 = 101.5. Since only discrete values may occur,
either 101 or 102 must be used, which correspond to the physical values 1010
or 1020. It is these two numbers which appear in the dialog.
In spite of discrete memory storage, quantities which have digits after the decimal
point can be valid. In the example above, if a factor of 10.5 is used for calculation
1008 and 1018.5 are recommended as possible values.

4.1.4 Entry of Mode-Dependent Signals


Generally there is a direct, fixed assignment of a message's data segment to a sig-
nal. However, for multiplex messages different signals are transmitted in the data
segments, depending on a mode signal. Only a subset of all possible signals of the
message is defined for a mode value.
In the dialog for inputting signal values, the standard signals and mode-dependent
signals are shown in two separate list boxes for ease of input. Additionally, all those
signals not defined in the active mode are filtered out in the mode-dependent list box.
The Mode signal and the Mode are displayed in the associated Edit boxes. If the
mode value is changed, the list with mode-dependent signals is reconstructed. The
mode signal itself cannot be changed here.

4.1.5 Function Generator for the Transmit List


It is often the case that the user wishes not only to place certain signal values on the
bus, but rather entire signal responses. The generator block has a signal response
generator for this purpose, which you configure with the [Response...] button.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


125

Figure 72: Signal Response Generator

The configuration dialog allows you to parameterize a trapezoidal function. When the
dialog is exited with OK the corresponding lines are automatically generated in the
generator block transmit list. The following signal responses can be generated with
certain parameters:

Signal response Parameter


Square ta = tf = 0
Triangular th = tv = 0
Saw-tooth th = tf = tv = 0 or
ta = th = tv = 0
Constant n1 = n2

Displayed in the upper part of the dialog box are the message and the signal. Shown
below this, in the preview box, are a trapezoid and the meanings of its parameters.
By setting individual parameters to zero, the following responses can be generated:
The levels n1 and n2 must be entered physically. The relevant limitations apply here
(see for example generator block signal values).
The entry for transmit interval identifies the interval between any two messages, and
this corresponds to the entry in the generator block dialog Trigger initiation period.
Since CAN is message-based and not signal-based, all signals of a message get the
same transmit interval!
Since this signal characteristic generator is only a tool for the generator block and is
not a block itself, the following must be observed when using different period lengths
for several signals within one message:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


126

The generator creates a list of messages with:


No. of messages = Period / Transmit spacing
This is exactly one period. If the transmit list contains more they are rejected. Using
the combination box Remainder of the user can define how remaining signals are to
be handled for supplementally generated messages:
• All bytes to 0:
All signals are set to the raw value 0.
• Continue cyclically:
During generation the previous messages are copied as often as necessary un-
til the new period length is reached.
Example:
The original list contains 3 messages, and the new period length requires 9
messages. The new signal (byte 1) is a saw tooth.

Original Transmit List: New Transmit List:


00040 10040
01020 21020
02040 32040
40040
51020
62040
70040
81020
92040

The recommended procedure for generating multiple signals is therefore as follows:


The signals are defined beginning with the shortest period length. Then only integer
multiples of this period length are used.

4.2 Interactive Generator Block (IG)


The purpose of the interactive generator block is to generate and transmit messages.
Messages can also be configured and interactively transmitted during a measure-
ment (Online). This makes the interactive generator block especially well suited for
influencing a measurement in a quick and improvised way. In many cases, with the
interactive generator block you can achieve your goal without the use of traditional
generator blocks and without CAPL blocks.
Interactive generator blocks appear in the data flow plan of the measurement setup
as small blocks with the label IG. Just like traditional generator blocks they are per-
meable to all data in the data flow diagram. That is, they do not filter the data flow like
filter blocks or CAPL blocks do, rather they act in a purely additive manner.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


127

For examples of interactive generator block implementation please refer to the


CANoe Help function.

4.2.1 Configuring the Interactive Generator Block


The configuration dialog is subdivided into a Transmit List (upper half of window)
and a Signal List (lower half of window). In the Transmit List you can select individ-
ual messages and configure them. Assigned to each message is a Signal List in
which signal values can be configured.

Figure 73: Configuration of the Interactive Generator Block

All input boxes are explained in the status bar at the lower border of the dialog. The
explanation is always shown for the currently selected box entry. There are also key-
board shortcuts for use without the mouse; these are described in section 4.2.1.7.

4.2.1.1 Transmit List


The list of messages to be sent (Transmit list) is available in two views: Rows and All
Columns.
In the Rows view the most important columns of the transmit list are summarized in
an easy-to-read format, while in the All Columns view even seldomly used message
parameters and trigger conditions appear. The widths of the columns can be adjusted
from their borders.
The [Layout] button is used to have the columns automatically configured to the
most easy-to-read layout.
The [New] button is used to input messages in the transmit list. The procedure differs
depending on whether or not a database is associated to the CANoe configuration:
If there is a database, messages from the database can be added to the transmit list.
Clicking the [New] button opens the Message Explorer with which messages can be
selected symbolically. They are then assumed in the transmit list. Afterwards the sig-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


128

nals of the messages can be configured individually in their signal lists. An alternative
to activating the [New] button is to double click with the left mouse button in the first
empty line of the message name column of the Message Explorer.
Without a database you can transmit any desired messages by manually entering the
CAN identifier of the desired message in the transmit list (Identifier column). To gen-
erate a new message click in the first empty cell of Identifier column with the left mou-
se button or press the [New] button. After selecting the desired number of data bytes
for the message (DLC column) you can then input the data bytes (Data field col-
umns). The signal list remains empty.

Note: The [ErrorFrame] button can be used to enter an Error frame in the
transmit list. This allows Error frames to be transmitted on the bus. Re-
mote frames can be created from normal messages in the transmit list,
except that in the Frame message parameter column the description
Remote is selected instead of Data.

4.2.1.2 Value Generator


In addition to already existing messages/signals new generated signals can be
transmitted too.
The following generator types are available:
• Toggle switch
• Range of values
• Ramps and pulses
• Random
• Sine
• Environment variable
• User defined
You can find details for using the different types in the online help.

4.2.1.3 Trigger Condition


The trigger condition (Triggering columns) is, in contrast to the traditional generator
block, entered separately for each message.
You can choose between manual interactive triggering ([Send] button), key press
(Key column) and interval-driven repetition (Timer; Cycle time column [ms]). Addi-
tionally, the user can configure the number of messages to be sent at the time of trig-
gering (Burst column). The default value for Burst is 1, i.e. exactly one message is
sent per triggering.

4.2.1.4 Generating a High-Load Situation


With the High load trigger condition you can induce a high load situation.
A high bus load is reached when messages follow right after one another on the bus.
To achieve this, after successful transmission of one message the next transmit re-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


129

quest of the same message must follow immediately. The number set in “Burst” indi-
cates the current number of messages in the transmit queue.

Note: When high load is configured no other simultaneous triggering of the same
message should be performed manually by keyboard or by timer, since the
transmit queue might overflow. Furthermore, the associated receive ac-
knowledgments (Tx or TxRq events) in front of the interactive generator
block in the data flow plan must not be filtered out; otherwise the transmit
queue will not be refilled.

4.2.1.5 Entering Signal Values


The list of message signals is taken from the database from which the particular
message originates. If no database is associated, the list remains empty.
The list contains - for each signal - the signal name, raw value, physical value and
units. The signal name and units are taken from the database. The raw value and
physical value are adjustable. Possible value ranges are shown in the status bar at
the bottom of the dialog.
You only need to enter the raw value or physical value, since the corresponding value
is always also calculated by the signal's conversion formula. If a physical signal value
is entered whose raw value equivalent lies between two raw values and therefore
cannot be represented, it is automatically rounded up or down to the next closest
value.
If the signal is of the type Enumeration (Enum), the defined value descriptions are
presented to you in a selection list in the input box for selection. This permits sym-
bolic selection of the signal value. For bit signals a check box is provided, which
makes it easy to toggle the bit value.
The three columns on the right represent a decrementer and incrementer , with which
the physical signal value can be easily changed by an amount that is set in the Phys.
Step column. Shown at the far left is the start bit SB of the signal within the message.

4.2.1.6 Entering Mode-Dependent Signals


As a rule, a message's data segment has a direct, fixed assignment to a signal. With
multiplex messages a mode signal is used to assign different signals to a data seg-
ment, so-called mode-dependent signals. The mode value indicates those signals
that are currently valid from the set of all possible message signals. That is, only a
portion of all possible signals of the message are defined for a given mode value.
In the configuration dialog for the interactive generator block mode signals and mode-
dependent signals of a message appear highlighted in color in the signal list. Mode
signals are light green, and mode-dependent signals are shown in dark green. When
the mode is changed in the mode signal, its associated signals are shown. All signals
not defined in the currently set mode are filtered out.

4.2.1.7 Keyboard Control


The following keyboard shortcuts apply to work in the interactive generator block:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


130

Spacebar Toggles the states of check boxes and activates the Send buttons.
Opens the Message Explorer to the message name fields
Arrow keys Switches between the various buttons and input boxes. The box
(Å,Æ,Ç,È) entries are explained in the status bar at the dialog's lower border.
<Ctrl><Ç> Increments or decrements the value of the active box (by 1 for tim-
<Ctrl><È> ers and data bytes of a message, and by the lowest possible raw
value difference for signal values on a signal line)
<Ctrl><Å> Logarithmic calibration of the slider in the timer columns of the
<Ctrl><Æ> transmit list
<Page Ç> Increments or decrements a signal value on a signal line by the
<Page È> configured step width (Phys. Step).
<Esc> Exits the editing box, whereby any change is canceled and the pre-
viously set value is restored.
Attention: <Esc> during a running measurement will terminate
the measurement!
<F9> Starts the measurement

Note: As long as the configuration dialog for the Interactive Generator block is
opened and active, all keyboard entries except <F9> and <Escape> are
used to edit the dialog. Therefore the defined key can only initiate trans-
mission by the generator blocks or activation of CAPL program nodes pro-
vided that the CANoe main window is activated, or test mode is explicitly
activated in the configuration dialog.

4.2.2 The Interactive Generator Block as a Gateway


The IG additionally offers a gateway function. With this function, you can transfer in-
formation from one bus to another. Necessary inputs you have to do in the IG con-
figuration dialog.
Therefore CANoe offers two modes:
• Transfer of chosen signals
Activate first the register "All columns" of the dialog's upper list. Choose the de-
sired signal with the [New] button afterwards.
• Transfer of the whole bus communication
If you choose the * sign as identifier, the whole bus communication will be trans-
ferred from one bus to the other.
If you transfer the whole bus communication, you also can build additional rules for
signals. These rules have priority for the relevant signals.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


131

4.3 Replay Block


The replay block makes it possible to replay measurement sequences which have
already been recorded. To do this, the user specifies a log file. Messages contained
in it are introduced into the data flow. The most important application is replaying a
recorded data stream onto the CAN bus. To do this, the replay block must be inserted
in the transmit branch.
Instructions on how to use Replay blocks to also play back environment variables,
e.g. to generate test sequences, are given in section 4.3.1.
Replay blocks appear in the data flow plan as small blocks with the label R. Double
clicking these blocks causes a dialog box to appear, in which the replay block can be
configured.
The user can specify whether RX messages or TX messages are to be transmitted or
not. The user can also choose whether messages originating from CAN controller 1
should be transmitted on CAN 1 or CAN 2, or should not be transmitted at all, and
similarly for messages originating from CAN 2.
The file can be transmitted once or cyclically. For cyclic transmission, transmission
resumes with the first message after the end of the file is reached.
There are three possibilities to define the start of transmission of the first message
of the file.
• Immediate
The first message is transmitted at the start of measurement.
• Original
The time of transmission is defined by the time saved with the message in the
file.
• Specified
The user sets the time explicitly in milliseconds since the start of measurement.
In all three cases the time spacing between messages within the file is preserved. If it
is less than one millisecond, transmission is delayed accordingly.
The configuration is lost when a replay block is removed from the measurement
setup (by selecting the command Delete configuration in the popup menu). This
only affects the options set in the dialog box. The replay file itself is not deleted.

4.3.1 Replay of Environment Variables


The replay block provides you with the opportunity to inject both binary and ASCII
files into the simulation setup.
Thus, you can edit ASCII log files with a conventional text editor before you play them
back in the replay block. In particular, you can also generate your own ASCII files
with the sequences of values of certain environment variables to inject them into the
measurement through the replay block.
The replay block reads an ASCII file line-by-line. Enter the number format in the first
line. If the integer values in your file are to be interpreted as decimal values, you
write:
base dec

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


132

If you wish to enter the numbers in hexadecimal format, you write:


base hex
You can comment out any line of the file by two forward slashes followed by a blank
character (// ). For lines which are to be fed into the measurement from a replay
block, you would first enter the time of transmission in seconds (after start of meas-
urement) in the first column. To play back an environment variable you would write
the name of the environment variable in the second column followed by a space
character, the relational operator :=, another space character and the variable value.
Besides environment variables, in the ASCII replay you can also inject messages and
error frames in the ongoing measurement. Again, the first column contains the time of
transmission. In the second column you would specify which of the two CAN control-
lers (1 or 2) you wish to have the message or error frame transmitted by. For an error
frame you would write "Errorframe" in the third column. You have the option of work-
ing with either symbolic names or message identifiers.

4.3.2 Example of an ASCII Replay File with Environment Variables


// Number format: Decimal
base dec
// Time Name of EV Value
1.0000 LightSwitch := 1
2.0000 LightSwitch := 2
4.0000 MotorSwitch := 1
4.1000 SpeedEntry := 100.0
4.2000 SpeedEntry := 150.00
4.3000 SpeedEntry := 200.00
4.4000 SpeedEntry := 300.00
4.5000 SpeedEntry := 500.00
4.6000 SpeedEntry := 800.00
4.7000 SpeedEntry := 2000.00
4.8000 SpeedEntry := 2200.00

4.4 Trigger block


The trigger block is the same as the trigger for the logging (block) configuration. You
can place this trigger not only in front of the logging block but also everywhere (Hot-
Spot) in the measurement setup.
You can find more about the trigger configuration in chapter 2.7.1 (page 60) and in
the online help.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


133

4.5 Filter block


The volume of data can be selectively reduced by using the filter block. Toggling be-
tween a pass filter and a stop filter will pass or block those identifiers and/or identifier
ranges that are specified. This is done with the button [Filter type]. All messages of a
network node can be filtered as well.
In addition, the message type affected by the filtering function can be set for the iden-
tifier, as well as whether filtering should also apply to error frames.

Note: If you have installed CANoe Option LIN you can find more information in
the manual's chapter Option LIN or in the online help.

Filter blocks are entered in the data flow plan by right clicking a hotspot, and appear
as small blocks with the label PF (Pass Filter) or SF (Stop Filter). When these blocks
are double clicked a configuration dialog appears in which the filter can be param-
eterized or selectively deleted by specifying messages (ranges), error frames, net-
work nodes and attributes.

Figure 74: Filter configuration dialog

The filter configuration is lost when a filter block is removed from the measurement
setup (by choosing the command Delete this node in the popup menu or <Del>).

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


134

Note: In keeping with its function, a pass filter which is not configured (empty)
does not pass any messages and so blocks all message traffic. If older
configurations are opened with Version 3.1, their old pass and stop filters
will reappear.

4.6 Channel Filter


It is possible to completely block all messages on a channel or to let them pass with a
channel filter.
The channel filter can be seen in the data flow plan as a small block in which the ac-
tual setting is graphically shown. Blocked channels are represented by broken red
lines; those which are not blocked appear as green lines.

Figure 75: Channel filter in the data flow plan

Double clicking on the filter symbol opens a configuration dialog in which the avail-
able channels are seen and can be set.

Figure 76: Configuration dialog for channel filter

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


135

The filter configuration is lost when a channel filter is removed from the measurement
setup (Delete this node in the popup menu or with <Del>)

Note: A channel filter which has not been configured can be used in the data
flow plan to simply show the number of channels being used.

4.7 CAPL Nodes in the Simulation Setup


A CAPL node is a universal function block whose characteristics the user defines by
writing a CAPL program. CAPL nodes in the simulation setup are called Network
nodes. Together with the real nodes they define the functionality of the overall sys-
tem. A functional description of a network node includes the node's behavior with re-
gard to input and output variables as well as messages to be received and transmit-
ted. The event-driven, procedural language CAPL is provided in CANoe for modeling
network nodes.
When a new setup is created (Menu item File│New configuration), first the simu-
lated bus (red line) and the real CAN bus (black line) are displayed in the simulation
setup. The two buses are connected to one another via the card icon.

Figure 77: Configuration Dialog for Network Node

When you click the bus image with the right mouse button, the popup menu of the
CAN bus appears. You can insert a network node in the simulation setup with the
menu command Insert network node. This is displayed as a rectangular function

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


136

block which is initially connected to the simulated bus, i.e. the bus with the red line.
The function block contains two text lines. The upper line shows the name of the
node and is initially empty for a newly inserted node. The status bar below it provides
information on node status and node type.
The configuration dialog for a network node can be opened by right clicking on the
network node and choosing Configure from the popup menu. The corresponding
node name can be selected from those defined in the database; if no name is se-
lected the name will remain << default >>.
With the [File...] button you can open a file selection dialog. Here you can select the
CAPL program which describes the functionality of the network node. The [Edit] but-
ton opens the CAPL Browser with which you can create the selected CAPL program
or edit it later in a user-friendly manner. All CAPL programs must be compiled before
the measurement start. This is done by activating the [Compile] button or by select-
ing the menu command Configuration│Compile all nodes.
The node status option buttons can influence the function of a node. The status real
indicates a node on a real bus. It is shown in the simulation setup by a black connect-
ing line to the actual bus and is designated as real in its status line. In this case the
network node model has no influence on the measurement.
Simulated nodes are represented as red connection lines to the simulated bus. Dur-
ing a measurement its functionality is simulated by an assigned CAPL program. The
bus behavior of the network node does not differ from that of a real controller with the
same functionality.
Individual network nodes can be switched-off intentionally with the options button off.
This breaks the connection to the bus.5
The user simply presses the spacebar to toggle the status of the currently active
node in the simulation setup. The node status changes with each spacebar press
from simulated to real to off and back to simulated.
The menu item Start delay can influence the behavior of the network node before
the start of the measurement. The button switches this influence to active, which
causes the node to remain inactive for the set time period after the start of the meas-
urement. Messages are neither sent nor received during this time, nor do they react
to external conditions such as environment variables or key presses.
This delay can also be defined as a supplemental attribute in the database and acti-
vated via the corresponding checkbox.
The simulated network node timers can also be influenced by Drift and Jitter. When
this is the case, the user can toggle between fixed deviation and an equally distrib-
uted fluctuation. With fixed deviation the value can be given in per cent, and all tim-
ers for this network node will expire a bit faster or slower around this value. With uni-
form distribution, on the other hand, an interval can be entered from which the fluc-
tuations of each timer is purely chosen.
These values can also be defined as supplemental attributes and activated from
CANdb++.

5
In Version 1.0 this has the same effect as the option real.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


137

Note: When a CAPL node is removed from the simulation setup the CAPL
source file is not deleted.

4.8 CAPL Nodes in the Measurement Setup


Important applications of program blocks in the measurement setup include, e.g. ac-
tivation of triggers or data reduction or monitoring in the measurement setup.

Note: A CAPL node in a data flow branch blocks all messages that are not ex-
plicitly output in the program with output(). A program that is transparent
for all messages must therefore contain the following message procedure:

on message * {
output(this); /* Pass all messages */
}

Consequently, the intentional use of output(this) also permits the pro-


gramming of evaluation branch filters using CAPL programs whose func-
tionality can be much more complex than that of normal pass or blocking
filters.

Program blocks appear in the data flow plan as small blocks with the label P. When
you click these blocks with the right mouse button and choose Configuration a dialog
appears with the following buttons:

Figure 78: Configuration Dialog for CAPL Programs in the Measurement Setup

First, in the configuration dialog you assign a CAPL file name (Extension *.CAN) to
the program block.
Press [Edit] to open the CAPL Browser. Browser is a user-friendly tool for creating,
modifying and compiling CAPL programs.
Before you start the measurement you must compile the CAPL file. To do this, press
the [Compile] button or choose Configuration│Compile all nodes in the main
menu to compile all CAPL programs at once.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


138

Note: It is permissible to reference the same CAPL programs in different pro-


gram blocks. For example, this may be of interest if the same data ma-
nipulations are to be made in two different data flow branches (e.g. data
reduction operations).

You can deactivate the node by pressing the spacebar or selecting the item Node
active in the CAPL node's popup menu. Executing the same action again will reacti-
vate the node. The menu item Delete this Node removes the CAPL node from the
measurement setup.

Note: The CAPL source file is not deleted when a CAPL node is removed from
the measurement setup (by selecting the command "Delete configuration"
in the popup menu).

4.9 Environment Variable Filters in the Measurement Setup

4.9.1 Pass and Stop Filters for Environment Variables


A targeted reduction of data volume can be achieved in the measurement setup with
pass and stop filters for environment variables. Only the specified environment vari-
ables are passed or blocked.
Pass filters or stop filters for environment variables appear in the data flow plan as
small blocks with the label PE or SE. When the user clicks one of these blocks with
the right mouse button a popup menu appears in which the filter can be configured or
deleted. Configuration is performed in a dialog box, in which the environment vari-
ables can be selected from the database.

Note: In keeping with its function, a pass filter which is not configured, i.e. is
empty, does not pass any environment variables.

4.9.2 Configuration of the Environment Variable Filter


The characteristics of the environment variable filter are entered by the user in the
configuration dialog.
The name of the active database appears in the uppermost line. You can select the
filter for the environment variables from this database.
The user activates the filter with Mode=active. If the mode is inactive the filter is ig-
nored in the data flow plan.
With the [Add] button you can accept additional environment variables in the filter.
With [Delete] you remove all environment variables from the filter which were previ-
ously marked in the selection list.

4.9.3 Selecting Environment Variables


In this dialog you can select environment variables in the multiple selection list on the
right side of the dialog.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


139

The left side of the dialog is used for preselection of environment variables which are
displayed in the multiple selection list. In the upper left box you can check off whether
all those environment variables should be displayed, to which at least one network
node of the database has read or write access. In the two lower boxes you check off
whether all those environment variables should be displayed, to which at least one of
the selected network nodes from the network node list has read or write access.
(Read and write authorizations for environment variables must be assigned in the
database.)
The check boxes which you check are logically OR'd with one another. Therefore, it is
not possible for example to simultaneously check off the upper and third check
boxes, since both relate to read access of environment variables.

4.9.4 Examples of Preselection of Environment Variables


If you are working with databases for which read and write access to environment
variables was not defined fully or not defined at all, please observe the following: In
order to be able to select environment variables from such "incomplete" databases,
all environment variables for which neither read nor write access was defined are
treated as though all network nodes can access them.
• To display all environment variables from the database in the environment vari-
able list, check off All with read access and All with write access.
• To display all environment variables in the environment variables list to which
the network node NK1 has read and write access, first select the network node
NK1 at the lower left in the network node list and then mark the check boxes
With read access and With write access in the lower left area.
• To display all environment variables to which the network nodes NK1 and NK2
have write access, first select both network nodes in the network nodes list and
then mark the check box With write access in the lower left area. Make sure
that none of the other check boxes are marked.

4.10 Break
If certain branches of the data flow in the measurement setup should not be run
through, then a hotspot can be converted to a breakpoint. This is advisable, e.g. in
online mode, if all functions (above all in the Trace window) cannot be serviced any
longer without loss of data due to a high data rate.
When a break is created the configuration after the break is fully preserved, so that
the old state can be reinstated after the break is deleted. Therefore, the break pro-
vides a very quick means for temporarily disconnecting certain data paths and
thereby saving computer time.
At the start of a measurement the currently valid data flow plan is converted to an
internal tree structure. In this conversion process breaks which are encountered in a
path are propagated forward to the next branching point. Therefore, it is irrelevant to
processor loading whether a break is placed at the front or back of a path. The same
path is always masked out.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


140

5 The Panel Editor


The Panel Editor is used to create graphic panels. With these panels the user can
change the values of discrete and continuous environment variables interactively dur-
ing the simulation.
Start the Panel Editor with the button on the CANoe toolbar, with a double click
with the left mouse button on an opened panel or - after selecting one or more panels
- with the [Edit] button of the panel configuration dialog. This will ensure that the da-
tabases of your CANoe configuration will be associated automatically.
As an alternative, together with the program call on the command line you can enter
a CAN database that contains the names and types of the necessary environment
variables. For example, the call vpanel /d example.dbc starts the Panel Editor
with the database EXAMPLE.DBC.
You can create a new panel with the menu item File│New. File|Open opens an ex-
isting panel. If the database does not contain the environment variable names asso-
ciated with the panel's indicator and control elements, you will receive an error mes-
sage. In this case you should first associate the correct database or start the Panel
Editor directly from CANoe.
File│Save saves changes made in the editor to the active panel file, while selecting
the menu command File│Save as saves the active panel to a new file.

5.1 Introduction
At the start of the Panel Editor from CANoe, the environment variable lists of the da-
tabases configured there are automatically associated.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


141

Figure 79: The Panel Editor

All elements which you can place on a panel in the Panel Editor are called controls.
Differentiation is made between control elements for which the values of environment
variables can be changed (e.g. switches, pushbuttons, etc.) and display elements for
which values of environment variables are displayed (e.g. lamps). Some elements
(e.g. sliders) can be used as both control and display elements.
Certain elements are available for each environment variable type. For example, you
would use switches and lamps for discrete environment variables, sliders for continu-
ous environment variables and text input fields for character string environment vari-
ables.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


142

Figure 80: CANoe Panels

In the Panel Editor you assign an environment variable or a signal - whose value is to
be changed or displayed - to all control and display elements. Moreover, you can
place static elements (text, bitmaps) on the panel which are independent of the envi-
ronment variables.
All control and display elements (switches and buttons for discrete environment vari-
ables, sliders for continuous environment variables , etc.) can be placed freely on the
panel and may also overlap. New alignment functions for individual elements and
group functions (e.g. center, left-justify, etc.) simplify the structuring of panels.
Elements can be configured after double clicking with the left mouse button. A special
requirement is that each control must have an environment variable or a signal as-
signed to it from the database. Panels are saved in CANoe panel file format (default
extension CNP) and can then be loaded in the simulation system.
Besides a variety of predefined elements, the Panel Editor lets you insert bitmap
elements with user-defined bitmaps. Overlapping and transparent elements allow you
to place controls in any desired manner on the panel, adjacent to one another or
above one another. They also enable the display of a wide variety of bitmap element
forms. There is a transparency color for the overall panel. This allows background
bitmaps for bitmap elements whose transparency is active to shine through.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


143

Note: It is now possible to automatically create the necessary panels from a cor-
respondingly prepared and initialized database with the Panel-Generator.
These panels can then be adapted to personal needs. For the detailed
procedure on how to use the Panel-Generator, please read the Online-
Help.

5.2 Editing a Panel


Under the menu item Options you will find entries for editing the panel.
Panel Size, Name, Color and Fonts... opens a dialog in which you can define the
name, size, background color and transparency color of the panels.
During CANoe operation the name of the panel appears in the panel window's title
bar. To make all elements you have positioned on the panel visible you must observe
the minimum values for window height and width given in brackets. The transparency
color applies to all panel bitmap elements whose transparency is active.
Please note that in adjusting the transparency color you also affect the elements with
default bitmaps, since they are based on the default option of the transparency color.
With the menu item Set grid you open a dialog in which a grid can be defined for po-
sitioning the elements. All elements are always positioned exclusively on the grid
points of the grid. This function makes it easier for you to attain horizontal and vertical
alignment of multiple elements on the same panel.

Note: With the buttons (Undo) and (Redo) you can undo or repeat the last
actions for placing and aligning elements.

5.3 Display and Control Elements


In this chapter creating, configuring and arranging of elements is treated.

5.3.1 Creating Elements


Under the menu item Elements you will find all control and display elements (Con-
trols), which can be integrated into a panel.
To position an element in the panel area, first select an entry from the menu. As an
alternative you can select an icon of the toolbar. (You will see a brief description of
the icon to which the mouse cursor is pointing in the status line on the lower border of
the Panel Editor.) You can select the element's position with the curser and confirm it
with the left mouse button. After they have been inserted, it is possible to move any of
the elements on the panel. To do this, select the element with the mouse, drag it to
the new position with the mouse button pressed, and then release the mouse button
(Drag & Drop).

Control Element Type of Environ- Switch Size Type


ment Variable Value configurable?

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


144

Text - - Yes static


Bitmap - - As bitmap static
Frame - - Yes static
Switch Discrete 1 No Sensor
Push Button Discrete 1 Yes Sensor
Radio Button Discrete Selectable No Sensor/
Actor
Slider Continuous Interval Yes Sensor/
Actor
Input/Output Dis- - Yes Sensor/
Control crete/Continuous/ Actor
Character string
Bitmap Push Discrete Selectable As bitmap Sensor/
Button Actor
Bitmap Discrete Selectable/ As bitmap Sensor/
Switch/Indicator Multistage Actor
Value Table Box Discrete - Yes Sensor/
Actor
Meter Continuous Interval Yes Actor
Hex Editor Binary data/ - Yes Sensor/
Character string Actor
Panel Recorder - - No special
element
Panel Control - - Yes special
Button element
Panel Help - - No special
element
Multi Display - Yes Actor
AciveX Control Control dependent Control de- Yes Control de-
pendent pendent

Elements of the Panel Editor

You can change the sizes of push buttons, sliders, text boxes pointer elements and
all input boxes. To do this you drag the border of the particular control to the desired
size while the mouse button is pressed. The marking frame sizes of bitmaps and bit-
map switches are indeed also adjustable on the panel, but the actual bitmaps always
retain their height and width.
With the standard functions Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete of the popup menu or the
main Edit menu, you can copy individual elements to the clipboard and from there
paste them on the same panel or another panel.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


145

5.3.2 Configuration of the Elements


Double clicking on an element in the panel opens the configuration dialog for the par-
ticular element. For example, with push buttons you can set the label as well as the
text font, while for bitmap elements you must input the name of the associated bitmap
file.
When the panel is created you must assign an environment variable or a signal to
each control and display element. To do this, select the desired environment variable
or the desired signal from the appropriate selection list in the configuration dialog.
Note, that signals indicate status only but no actions can be triggered.

Note: When the <Shift> key is pressed while the mouse pointer is simultane-
ously moved over an element, a window appears containing the name of
the assigned environment variables or the assigned signal. If you have en-
tered a comment for the environment variables in the CAN database, the
first comment line of the environment variable is displayed.

For the elements bitmap switch/indicator, push button, switch, radio button and bit-
map push button you must also enter a switch value. This value corresponds to the
value of the environment variable when the element is active. For example, a three-
stage switch can be constructed from three radio buttons by assigning the same envi-
ronment variable to all three elements, but selecting different switch values for each
of the radio buttons, e.g. 1 for the first, 2 for the second, and 3 for the third trigger.
The switch value 1 is assumed for push buttons and switches. Multi-stage switches
are incremented (decremented) by 1 when the right (left) mouse button is pressed,
respectively, whereby the smallest switch value is always 0. In configuring continuous
elements you must specify minimum and maximum values for the assigned environ-
ment variable.
The "Alarm states" function makes it possible for the elements meter, slider, in-
put/output box and ActiveX control to respond to a situation in which a value is above
or below of a previously defined value range.
This makes it possible to change the visual representation of the panel element that
displays the value when a specific limit value is reached. For example it is possible to
respond to a situation in which a value is above or below of a previously defined
value range of a pointer element by changing the color of the pointer.
For information on configuring elements please refer to the Panel Editor's Online
Help function in the particular configuration dialog.

5.3.3 Arranging the Control Elements


Besides the standard functions for all indicator and control elements - Cut, Copy,
Paste and Delete - with which you can copy individual elements to the clipboard and
paste them from there to the same panel or another panel, the Edit menu offers you
a number of functions for arranging and grouping elements. All functions relating to
an element can also be activated directly via the respective popup menu. The follow-
ing functions are available for arranging elements:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


146

Set to Foreground/Set to Background


Places the selected element in the foreground/background and refreshes the
panel with the active overlap sequence. After this function has been executed
the element is deselected.

Center
Places the selected element in the center of the panel horizontally.

Adjust Size
Adjusts the size of the bitmap element according to the number of states en-
tered in the configuration.

Left Alignment/Right Alignment


Places elements included in the group below one another, left/right justified,
whereby the element located furthest to the left serves as reference.

Center in Group
Centers elements included in the group beneath the uppermost group element.

One Level
Places all group elements on a single horizontal level, whereby the element lo-
cated furthest down serves as reference.

Same Height/ Same Width


All group elements assume the height/width of the tallest/shortest group ele-
ment, provided that this is permitted.

Tile with Same Spaces Horizontally/Vertically


All group elements are tiled with the same spaces horizontally or vertically. The
space between the first two elements is taken over for the following spaces be-
tween all other elements.

Tile Horizontally/Vertically
All group elements are tiled horizontally or vertically.

Group
Combines all selected elements into a group.
After activating the function with the left mouse button you select all elements to
be incorporated into the group by enclosing them in a rectangle. After releasing
the left mouse button, a thick frame appears around the highlighted rectangle
and all elements contained in the group.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


147

Only elements completely enclosed by the highlighted rectangle are assumed in


the group.
You can now move the element group with the mouse or cursor keys, or you
can use one of the alignment functions.
To deactivate the group, click the tool button again or click anywhere on the
Panel Editor screen that is outside of the group.

5.4 The ActiveX control


ActiveX controls are Windows components that are basically comparable to well
known controls in Windows. They do not have a fixed position in the system, how-
ever. Instead they are present in the form of .dll/.ocx files and can be integrated into a
given software module if the need arises.
ActiveX controls can also be used in CANoe panels.
Precondition for data exchange using CANoe – ActiveX control:
• The control element file (.dll/.ocx) in question is known in the CANoe system.
To ensure this for the control must be created a configuration file (.ini) contain-
ing the relevant information of the control. A configuration file must be created
manually or by using the ActiveX control wizard.
• The interfaces of the control are known.

Within the CANoe environment ActiveX controls can belong to two different hierar-
chies.
• ActiveX control elements (CANoe),
whose .ocx/.dll file and configuration file (.ini) are located in the directory {CA-
Noe-Pfad}\exec32\ActiveX.
These control elements belong to the system and are available in each configu-
ration.
• ActiveX control elements (panel)
whose .ocx/.dll file and configuration file (.ini) are located in the Panel directory.
These control elements belong to the corresponding configuration and are only
available in it.
If ActiveX control elements are installed in both the Panel directory and in the CANoe
directory with the same name, the control element in the Panel directory takes prece-
dence, i.e. only the control element in the Panel directory will be loaded and dis-
played.

5.4.1 The ActiveX control wizard


The ActiveX control wizard supports you in the following tasks:
• Adding new ActiveX control elements to the CANoe environment
• Removing ActiveX control elements from the CANoe environment
• Assigning control interfaces for the data exchange with CANoe

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


148

• With the exception of entries for the alarm function, the control element configu-
ration file can be created and changed with the aid of the wizard.

For additional information on installation, interface assignment and configuration of


ActiveX control elements, please see the Online help.

5.5 The Hexadecimal Editor


The Hexadecimal Editor (Hex-Editor) serves as a display and input element for envi-
ronment variables of the types String and Data. It represents environment variable
values in multiple lines and allows you to edit even larger data quantities byte-by-
byte.
Typical applications include editing or displaying larger data packets which occur with
transport protocols on higher layers and its use as a Man-Machine Interface.

Figure 81: The Hexadecimal Editor

You can insert a Hexadecimal Editor in the panel from the menu item Ele-
ments│Hex-Editor or from the button on the toolbar. After selecting the menu
item the cursor changes its form to a crosshair with appended rectangle. With the left
mouse button you confirm the selected position..
In Configuration mode the Hex-Editor can be called from the window border.
With Type you assign an environment variable with data or string type to the Hex-
Editor. In the alphabetically sorted list you can select the desired environment vari-
able.
In the Layout box you define the appearance that the Hex-Edit control should have.
With Columns per Line you set the width of the element. Afterwards, the number of
bytes corresponding to this width is shown.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


149

With View you can choose among three different representation formats for the bytes
of the environment variable:
• Hexadecimal and text fields (the two fields are shown next to one another)
• Only hexadecimal field
• Only text field
Hexadecimal representation consists of blocks, each with two hexadecimal digits.
Each block represents one byte of the environment variable value.
Text representation consists of keyboard characters. Each byte of the environment
variable is represented as a character in ASCII code. If no printable ASCII character
corresponds to the byte value, a dot is shown.
You can have your entries accepted in the environment variable by pressing the <En-
ter> key, moving the cursor to another box, or choosing the Accept menu item.
Please note that in accepting environment variables of the String type, characters are
only read up to a terminating null character (byte value zero). Characters that follow
are not assumed in the variable. For environment variables of the Data type, on the
other hand, the null character is not terminating.
In the Text Attributes box the font and background color can be configured. With a
reset, the text attributes prescribed as default values are assumed.

Note: You can use the <Insert> key to toggle between the two input modes
Insert and Overwrite.

5.6 Working with Bitmap Controls


With bitmap elements differentiation is made between two-stage and multistage ele-
ments. The first group consists of bitmap push button and two-stage bitmap
switch/indicator .The second group includes multistage bitmap switch/indicator. In
the configuration dialog you can assign a bitmap file to each of these elements.
You can create bitmap files with any bitmap editor (e.g. Paintbrush or Borland Re-
source Workshop). The formats for CANoe panel bitmaps are described in the follow-
ing section.

Note: After you have edited a bitmap in the Panel Editor that is used by one or
more elements, you can update it with Reload Bitmaps.

Examples of bitmaps that you can integrate directly into your panels or use as pat-
terns for your own elements, are located in the directory DEMO_CAN_CN\COLLECT.
The CANoe sample configuration COLLECT.CFG gives you an overview of this bit-
map collection.

5.6.1 Bitmap File Format


A bitmap file for a two-way switch always consists of 3 rectangular partial bitmaps of
identical height and identical width which are arranged horizontally. The inactive state
is displayed in the rectangle on the left. This state appears in the panel, e.g. before

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


150

the measurement start or if no environment variable was assigned to the element.


The logical state for OFF is displayed to the right of the first rectangle. It corresponds
to the environment variable value 0. In the third position is the logical state for ON.
This corresponds to the switch value of the environment variable.

Figure 82: Bitmap for a switch with three states

A bitmap file for a n-stage switch consists of n+1 rectangular partial bitmaps of identi-
cal height and width arranged horizontally. Again, the inactive state is displayed on
the left. The n switch values are located in the n partial bitmaps to the right of this.
To be able to integrate bitmap files more easily into the panels, it is advisable to make
the number of stages discernible in the file names. The bitmaps supplied in the sam-
ple directories DEMO_CAN_CN\AUTOMOT and DEMO_CAN_CN\COLLECT show you a
possible naming convention. The names of n-stage bitmaps here always end with "
_N".

Note: When creating your own bitmaps the bitmap editor program should be set
to save the bitmap as an uncompressed Windows bitmap. Special com-
pressed bitmaps cannot be processed by some graphics drivers, which
can lead to unpleasant visual effects or even system crashes.

5.6.2 Configuration of Bitmap Elements


In the configuration dialog of a bitmap element you open a file selection dialog with
the [File] button. In this dialog you assign a bitmap to the element. Please note that
your bitmap must always contain one partial bitmap more than the number of states
that you entered under States above, according to the format described in section
5.6.1. The left partial bitmap represents the invalid state and is displayed, for exam-
ple, if no valid environment variable or no valid signal was assigned to the element.
You activate or deactivate the element's transparency in the check box Transparent
Color. For background bitmaps it is advisable not to activate the transparency, so
that the drawing requirements are not increased unnecessarily.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


151

Figure 83: Configuration Dialog for Bitmap Controls

Note: To adapt the size of the control to the bitmap and number of states, select
the menu item Edit|Fit size after you have exited the configuration with
[OK].

5.6.3 Color Resolution of Bitmaps


The quality of the display of bitmap elements depends on the configured monitor
color resolution. If you are using bitmap elements to which high-resolution bitmap
files are assigned (number of colors > 256) in your panels, the color resolution of
your monitor should also be configured for the same color resolution for optimum
color quality. As an alternative, in this case you could also set the
PaletteReduced=1 option in the [PALETTE] section of the VPANEL.INI file in
the EXEC32-directory. This results in a reconfiguration of the system palette, which
leads to improved display of high-resolution bitmaps. To achieve the same results in
CANoe, set the same option in the [VPANEL] section of the CAN.INI file. Since the
use of a reconfigured palette involves increased loading time, this option should only
be activated if you are using high-resolution bitmaps and it is not possible to improve
the monitor color resolution.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


152

5.7 Overlapping
While creating the panels you can position the panels on top of each other. This se-
quence of the elements is called overlap sequence.
If you want to chance the overlap sequence, you have to select an element and place
it in the foreground or in the background.
Initially, when a new element is added to the panel it is placed in the foreground until
the overlap sequence is modified or another element is added.
A marked element is always shown in the foreground, without influencing the actually
overlap sequence of the elements.

Note: In test mode the overlap sequence is always displayed. You can update
the display of overlaps based on the overlap sequence with the function
Update panel.

5.7.1 Transparency Color


Bitmap elements whose transparencies are active allow background bitmaps to show
through in areas of transparency color. Thus, the transparency color remains invisi-
ble. This allows the elements to assume any desired forms.
To draw a bitmap with transparency, fill the areas that are to be transparent with the
transparency color of the panel. In the bitmap element's configuration dialog mark the
check box Transparent Color.
The user can select the panel's transparency color in the dialog of the menu item
Panel Size, Name, Color and Fonts. The default setting of the transparency color is
pure blue (RGB(0,0,255)) and should only be changed if there is good reason to do
so, e.g. to utilize created bitmaps with transparency color in multiple panels. The de-
fault bitmaps of the bitmap elements are based on the default transparency color set-
ting.
Non-bitmap elements, such as push buttons, sliders, input boxes or text boxes, are
not represented in transparency areas for bitmap elements.

5.7.2 Background Bitmaps


Background bitmaps are bitmaps, which are lying for a better layout in the back-
ground of all other elements.

5.8 Test Mode


With the menu item Test│Start or Test│Stop you can activate or deactivate test
mode. In test mode you can monitor the functionality of the controls. However, all
menu commands for configuring the panel are inactive.
In test mode all input and display elements react to user actions in the same way as
during CANoe operation. Values of the assigned environment variables are set or
value changes are displayed.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


153

5.9 Panel Control


For complex CANoe models with many input and display panels it is often impossible
to arrange them all simultaneously on the screen. On the one hand, the screen does
not provide enough space. On the other hand, system resources are inadequate to
simultaneously open an arbitrary number of panels.
However, usually only a small subset of all panels is needed a any given time for
measurements and simulation runs. Panel control for CANoe therefore provides you
with the option of grouping panels according to your work requirements.
With different panel control buttons you can select, which panel should be opened
or closed during the measurement.
Each panel control button is configured with a list of the panels which are opened
when the button is activated. Then during a measurement you can open specific
panel groups from the control panel simply by pressing the appropriate panel control
button.
In the panel control configuration dialog, under Text you enter the text you wish to
label the button with. Under Font Size you can enter the size of the text characters.
In the list below this you now enter the panels to be opened when the button is acti-
vated. All panels not entered in the list are closed automatically if you activate the
check box Close Other Panels.

Note: In CANoe you can define permanent panels which are unaffected by panel
control actions, i.e. they remain open even after a panel control button is
activated, if they are not listed in the control list of the button.

With the [Add] button you can add new panels to the panel control list. Pressing
[Delete] removes all marked panels from the list. Press [Display] to open the panels
marked in the list for viewing.

Note: Since you may wish to use the same panel in various CANoe configura-
tions, the panel positions are managed directly by CANoe. Therefore, they
cannot be set in the Panel Editor.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


154

6 CAPL Programming
This chapter offers you a basic introduction in working with the programming lan-
guage CAPL. Examples and a reference of all commands you can find in the online
help.

6.1 Overview
The universal applicability of CANoe results in large measure from its user program-
mability.
The CAN Access Programming Language CAPL is a C-like programming language,
which allows you to program CANoe for individual applications. In the development of
network nodes, for example, the problem arises that the remaining bus nodes are not
yet available for tests. To emulate the system environment, the data traffic of all re-
maining stations can be simulated with the help of CAPL.
All CANoe program variations/ options support the CAPL functions. The following
program variations offer additional CAPL functions:
• CANoe.LIN resp. DENoe.LIN
• CANoe.MOST resp. DENoe.MOST
• CANoe.J1939
You can also write programs for problem-specific analysis of data traffic with CAPL,
or you can program a gateway - a connecting element between two buses - to ex-
change data between different CAN buses.
CAPL nodes are inserted in the data flow plan as function blocks. Event procedures
serve as inputs in CAPL. These procedures can react to external events (e.g. the
occurrence of specific messages). You send messages by calling the function
output(). These language tools and symbolic access to the various variables in the
database make it possible to create simple prototypical models of nodes. The event
procedures can be edited in the user-friendly Browser.

Note: You can find a detailed description of all CAPL functions in the online help.

6.1.1 Potential Applications of CAPL Programs


CAPL programs have an input through which messages pass as events into the
block. Appearing at the output are all messages that either pass through the program
or are generated by it. Furthermore, the program block can react to keyboard inputs
(Key), time events (Timer) and - with CANoe - to changes in environment variables
such as switches or slider positions.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


155

Therefore, you can utilize a CAPL program to develop monitoring and testing for your
special problem task. The CAPL program reacts to messages that CANoe registers
on the CAN bus, and afterwards you can call your own analysis and test functions.
You can also use a CAPL program to emulate the system environment for a control-
ler. The CAPL program reacts to both messages on the CAN bus and to your key-
board inputs, responding with certain CAN messages according to the event regis-
tered. It is entirely up to you to determine which actions are performed in response to
which events.
Another possible application of CAPL is to program a gateway - that is a connecting
element between two buses - to exchange data between different CAN buses and
moreover to correct erroneous data occurring in this exchange.
Last but not least, the logging block can also be triggered by a CAPL program. Con-
ditions of any desired complexity can be formulated for triggering. Triggering is initi-
ated by a call of the intrinsic function trigger().

6.1.2 Integration of CAPL Programs


A CAPL program can be inserted in the measurement setup at all hotspots and also
directly at the bus symbol in CANoe's simulation setup. To do this, select the menu
command Insert CAPL node from the hotspot's popup menu, and enter the name of
the CAPL program file you wish to assign to this node in the configuration dialog. If
you want to create a new CAPL program you can enter the name of a file that does
not exist here yet. This file is then automatically created when editing.
You open the CAPL Browser by pressing the [Edit...] button in the configuration dia-
log or by double clicking the CAPL node. You can create and modify CAPL programs
with this Browser.

Note: If you prefer to use your own editor to edit CAPL programs, enter it in the
[Environment] section of the CAN.INI file.

Before you start the measurement you must compile all CAPL programs of the con-
figuration. You can start the CAPL compiler from the CAPL Browser or from the con-
figuration dialog. To compile all nodes at once, simply choose the main menu item
Configuration│Compile all nodes.
Please note that a CAPL program may react completely differently, depending on the
point at which you place it in the measurement setup. For example, a CAPL program
located in CANoe's measurement setup can indeed generate messages, but it can-

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


156

not send them on the bus. Since the data flow is directed from left to right, these
messages are only passed to the function blocks to the right of the CAPL program.
Only messages generated by CAPL programs located in CANoe's simulation setup
can be sent out on the bus. This completely logical behavior - which may at first
seem surprising - applies equally to the generator block, which - when it is located in
the measurement setup - similarly generates messages without affecting the bus.
Therefore, in general those CAPL program blocks that exclusively serve analysis
purposes should be inserted on the right side of the measurement setup, while pro-
gram blocks for transmitting CAN messages should be inserted in CANoe's simula-
tion setup.

6.1.3 Use of the Symbolic Database in CAPL


Just like other function blocks in the measurement setup, from CAPL you also have
access to the symbolic information in the database. For example, instead of using the
identifier 100 in your CAPL program you could use the symbolic name EngineData at
all locations, provided that you have assigned this name to the identifier 100 in your
database.
Use of the symbolic database makes your programs essentially independent of in-
formation that only relates to the CAN protocol, but has no meaning for the applica-
tions. Let us assume, for example, that during the development phase you determine
that certain CAN identifiers in your system should be reassigned to change message
priorities, and that in your system the message EngineData should now get the hig-
her priority identifier 10 instead of the identifier 100.
In this case, let us assume that you have already developed test configurations and
CAPL programs for your system which are exclusively based on the symbolic infor-
mation (which do not use the identifier 100 anywhere, but rather always refer to the
name EngineData). After modifying the identifiers in the database, you can incorpo-
rate the new information in the configuration by recompiling the CAPL programs. It is
not necessary to adapt the CAPL programs to the new identifiers, since you only u-
sed symbolic names (e.g. EngineData), and not CAN identifiers (previously ID 100,
now ID 10).
Therefore, it is advisable to manage all information relating only to the CAN bus in
the database, and to use application-relevant symbolic information in CANoe exclu-
sively.

6.1.4 Introduction to CAPL


CAPL is a procedural language whereby the execution of program blocks is con-
trolled by events. These program blocks are known as event procedures.
The program code that you define in event procedures is executed when the event
occurs. For example, you can send a message on the bus in response to a key press
(on key), track the occurrence of messages on the bus (on message), or execute
certain actions cyclically (on timer).

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


157

ID 100
on message 100 {
Bus event: write("Message 100");
}

on key 'a' {
Keyboard event: write("'a' pressed");
}

on timer Uhr_1 {
Time event: write("Clock elapsed");
}

Figure 84: Examples of CAPL Event Procedures6

A CAPL program consists of two parts:


1. Declare and define global variables
2. Declare and define user-defined functions and event procedures

6.2 CAPL Browser


A special Browser is integrated in CANoe as a user-friendly means to create, modify,
and compile CAPL programs. Browser in this context is meant to signify a program
for fast and targeted editing of CAPL programs.

6
Besides keyboard events, in CANoe you can - with event procedures of the type on envvar also
react to actions that you perform yourself on user-defined control panels.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


158

Figure 85: The Browser screen

A special Browser is integrated in CANoe for the user-friendly creation and modifica-
tion of CAPL programs. This Browser shows you the variables, event procedures and
functions of a CAPL program in structured form.
Multiple Browser windows with different CAPL programs can be opened simultane-
ously.
The CAPL compiler is started from Browser's main menu or toolbar. Compilation time
is very short, even for larger programs. When an error is detected, the faulty program
section is shown, and the cursor is positioned at the location of the error. This makes
it very easy to make corrections.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


159

6.2.1 Opening Browser


Browser is located in the system directory (canbr32.exe) and can be started as a
stand-alone application like any other Windows program. However, it is recom-
mended that you always start Browser from CANoe, since a number of important pa-
rameters for the program start (database name, compiler options, hardware parame-
ters, CAPL-DLLs, etc.) must be passed.
When you start Browser by double clicking a CAPL node in the measurement setup
or in CANoe's simulation setup, the file PARBROW.INI with all start parameters is
automatically generated and made available to Browser. Therefore, always start
Browser from CANoe, and furthermore make sure that the file PARBROW.INI is
never given write protection, or else it might be impossible to pass important start
parameters properly the next time Browser is started.

Note: A CAPL program file can be dragged from the File Manager on a CAPL
Browser that has already been started (drag-and-drop). The file is then
displayed in a new window.

6.2.2 Browser Window


A Browser window is subdivided into up to four sub-windows, so-called "Panes".
At the upper left is the Browser tree, which contains the CAN event types as drop-
down nodes. These nodes each contain procedures that can be assigned to the CAN
event types. The upper part of the text editor to the right of the Browser tree shows
the global variables for the CAPL program; the lower part shows the procedure text
for the procedure selected in the Procedures List. The text editor can also be config-
ured so that global variables and procedures can be edited in a common editing win-
dow. Along the lower border is the Messages window used to display compiler mes-
sages for the CAPL program.
You can access the most important functions for each of the panes from the popup
menu by pressing the right mouse button. In the editor panes you have access, via
the popup menu, to the intrinsic CAPL functions and to the objects defined in the da-
tabase. Furthermore, you can copy text to the Clipboard from the popup menu, and
from there you can paste it in your program.
CAPL programs which are not available in Browser-specific file format are displayed
in unstructured format in a normal text window and can be edited there. As in the edi-
tors of the Browser window, the program text can be edited via the menu command
Edit or from the popup menu. In section 6.2.6 you will learn how to import such CAPL
programs in Browser format.

6.2.3 Compiling CAPL Programs


To generate an executable program file in CBF format (CAPL Binary Format, file ex-
tension *.CBF) from a CAPL program, you must compile the program with the CAPL
compiler.
Compilation of the program is started by the command Compile from the compiler
menu, or by pressing the Compile icon ( ) on the toolbar or by pressing the F9

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


160

key. If the CAPL program still does not have a file name, you are prompted to enter a
name for the CBF file. If the program already has a name, the name of the CBF file is
composed of the program name and the extension CBF.
All messages during the compilation process are output in the Message window
If errors or warnings occur during the compilation process, the Message window
automatically jumps to the foreground with the relevant error message. Double click
the message or select the line and execute the command Go to from the Messages
window to position the cursor at the location where the error occurred. After you have
corrected it and saved the program file again, you recompile the program. If the pro-
gram compiles without errors, the status Compiled appears in the status bar at the
bottom of Browser's main window.

6.2.4 Searching for Run-Time Errors


Usually more difficult than the search for syntax errors that can already be found at
compile time is the search for run-time errors. Nevertheless, CAPL offers you support
here in two ways.
On the one hand, a number of possible run-time errors are automatically monitored in
CAPL programs. These include:
• Division by zero
• Exceeding upper or lower array limits
• Exceeding upper or lower offsets in the data fields of messages
• Stack overflow in the call of CAPL subroutines
If such a run-time error is discovered, the measurement is terminated in a controlled
manner. You get a message in the Write window containing the name of the CAPL
program, the error type and an error index. With the help of this error index you can
easily find the location in the CAPL source text that caused the error: Enter the index
under the menu item Compiler│Find run-time errors.
On the other hand, as a user you have the option of generating run-time errors your-
self with the CAPL function runError(), thereby making specific critical program
sections fault-tolerant. In doing so, you can also give the function an error index
which is then output to the Write window upon completion of the measurement.

6.2.5 Access to the Database


Provided that you open Browser directly from the measurement setup or CANoe's
simulation setup , Browser gets information regarding the databases associated to
the configuration via the temporary file PARBROW.INI. But you can also associate
one or more databases to the CAPL program directly in Browser from the File menu.
In Browser you have access to the database's messages and signals via the Mes-
sage Explorer and Signal Explorer. You can open the selection dialog from the popup
menu item CANdb Message or CANdb Signal in the editor panes on the right side.
The selected object is assumed directly into the CAPL program text after exiting the
dialog with [OK]. Of course you may also enter the signal and message names di-
rectly as clear text in the editor panes instead of using the symbolic selection dialog.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


161

If you are using more than one database, the objects in the databases following the
first database are qualified by including the database name in the symbolic selection
dialogs. But you only need these qualified names to resolve ambiguities. As long as
the symbolic names are unique in all databases, you can refrain from qualifying sym-
bolic names when editing CAPL programs.
You can read about special considerations when using multiple databases in section
2.3.4.

6.2.6 Importing and Exporting ASCII Files


Browser offers an import function and an export function in the File menu to permit
editing of your CAPL programs with text editors other than Browser.
The structural information that Browser uses to display CAPL programs to you in
Browser format is contained in special comment lines. Browser automatically gener-
ates this information during compilation.
With File│Import a CAPL program that only exists in ASCII format can be loaded in
the CAPL Browser. The procedures defined in the program are assigned to the CAPL
procedure groups (e.g. Message, Timer, CAPL function, etc.). The command opens a
file selection dialog in which you select the file to be imported. When importing pro-
grams make sure that the programs can be compiled error-free, since otherwise it
might not be possible to recognize function names or procedure names unambigu-
ously.
With File│Export you can save CAPL programs in ASCII format. The generated file
does not contain any structural information of the CAPL Browser and can only be
displayed in a Browser window by importing it later.

6.2.7 Browser Options


In the menu Options│Editor... you will find commands for individual configuration of
the editors in the Browser panes
The menu item Options│Compiler... opens a dialog in which compiler options for
the active CAPL program can be changed. These options are automatically config-
ured for you, provided that you have opened Browser from the measurement setup
or the simulation setup. That is, normally you should not change the option settings
here.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


162

7 Option .CAN
In this chapter you get a short introduction in CAN specific features of CANoe.
For the CANoe Tour and various examples the bus system CAN is underlied.
In this chapter, you get some additional information about the specific features of Op-
tion .CAN.

Note: Please refer to the online help for further details.

7.1 The Trace Window of Option .CAN


Configuring the Trace window you can (also) choose CAN specific fields to be dis-
played.
For Option .CAN the following columns are available in the trace window:
Field Title Function
Time Time Absolute time from the measurement start, or relative
time from the previous event
Channel Chn LIN channel. Number of the channel on which the
message was sent/received
Identifier ID Identifier of the message
Name Name Symbolic name of the message
ID/Name ID/Name Depending on the global setting, either the symbolic
name or the identifier of the message
Dir Dir TX = Transmit message,
RX = Receive message,
TXRQ = Transmit request
DLC DLC Length of the data field
Data Data The data in decimal or hexadecimal representation.
For Remote Frames Remote Frame is shown here.
Attribute Attr Supplemental attributes.
WU = WakeUp, NERR = Transceiver Error.
HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS Absolute time from the measurement start in
hh:mm:ss.000-format (24h)
Diff time Diff time Relative time to the previous event
Bustype Bustype Specification of the bustype (CAN, LIN etc).
J1939-messages are specified as bustype "CAN", be-
cause J1939 is a protocol, not a bus
Send node Send node Specification of the send node, which is defined in the
database for the corresponding message. For J1939
this column is without any content!

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


163

Bus Bus bus name


Database Database Database in which the corresponding message is de-
fined

7.2 The Bus Statistics Window of Option .CAN


The Bus Statistics Window (also) displays CAN specific data and values.
For Option .CAN the following information are available in the bus statistics window:
• Busload [%]
• Peakload [%]
• Std. Data [fr/s]
• Std. Data [total]
• Ext. Data [fr/s]
• Ext. Data [total]
• Std. Remote [fr/s]
• Std. Remote [total]
• Ext. Remote [fr/s]
• Ext. Remote [total]
• Errorframe [fr/s]
• Errorframes [total]
• Chip State

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


164

8 Option .LIN
In this chapter you get a short introduction in CANoe.LIN resp. DENoe.LIN.
The most important and most used functions, features and applications are intro-
duced here.

Note: Please refer to the online help for further details.

8.1 Configuration of a LIN Test Environment


It is possible to configure a LIN test environment in various ways:
• Configuration by a LIN database
It is possible to configure LIN Slaves entirely from a LIN database, including
reasonable initial values for their transmit messages.
• Configuration by simpler CAPL functions
If the transmitted data are to be changed during the measurement, there are
simple CAPL functions for doing this. They also permit configuration of the LIN
Master.
• Configuration by more complex CAPL functions
Full LINda functionality can be achieved by the more complex functions of
CAPL API.

8.2 LIN Scheduler


At the beginning of the measurement, the scheduler is automatically configured with
data from the CANdb database. To do this, a master node must be defined in the
simulation structure. At measurement start the scheduler begins to send automati-
cally.
In addition to transmission requests of scheduling tables, transmission requests can
also be sent directly with output.
Using the LDFtoDBC converter, included with delivery, "LIN Description Files" (LDF)
can be converted directly into a CANdb database file.
To import a scheduler, follow the steps below:
• Generate a CANdb database with the LDFtoDBC converter.
• Assign the database
• Define a master node in the CANoe simulation structure or select the master
node as a LIN node in the CANalyzer.
The master node must be defined in the database that is generated.

8.3 LIN Simulator


In addition to simulating CAN networks, CANoe can also operate LIN networks with-
out hardware. Receiving and transmitting frames is simulated as for CAN.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


165

8.4 LIN Specifications


CANoe.LIN supports the LIN specifications 1.1 and 1.2.
With the new database attribute "LinProtocolVersion" you can switch between the LIN
specifications.

8.5 The Converter Tool LDF to DBC


With the included LDF to DBC Converter the LIN Description Files (*.LDF) can be
directly converted into CANdb database files (*.DBC).
Important features of the converter are:
• The converter accepts files in conformity with LDF specifications 1.1 and 1.2.
• The converter performs a strict test of syntax, but does allow for a few addi-
tions/deviations, which nevertheless will generate warnings.
• The converter performs a partial semantic test as well.
Thus, references to undefined identifiers (nodes, signals, etc.) will generate an
error, for example.
• Scheduler tables are stored in attributes.

8.6 Trace Window for Option .LIN


Configuring the Trace window you can (also) choose LIN specific fields to be dis-
played.
For Option .LIN the following columns are available in the trace window:
Field Title Function
Time Time Absolute time from the measurement start, or relative
time from the previous event
Channel Chn LIN channel. Number of the channel on which the
message was sent/received
Identifier ID Identifier of the message
Name Name Symbolic name of the message
ID/Name ID/Name Depending on the global setting, either the symbolic
name or the identifier of the message
Dir Dir TX = Transmit message,
RX = Receive message
DLC DLC Length of the data field
Data Data The data in decimal or hexadecimal representation
Protocol Full time Duration of the entire bus event (for example mes-
time sage, transmission error, reception error) in bit times
HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS Absolute time from the measurement start in
hh:mm:ss.000-format (24h)
Diff time Diff time Relative time to the previous event

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


166

Bustype Bustype Specification of the bustype (CAN, LIN etc).


J1939-messages are specified as bustype "CAN", be-
cause J1939 is a protocol, not a bus
Send node Send node Specification of the send node, which is defined in the
database for the corresponding message. For J1939
this column is without any content!
Typ Typ Type of event, e.g. transmission error
Specific 0 Checksum Checksum over the data field
Specific 1 FSM ID Number of the relevant finite state machine in the
LINda hardware
Specific 2 State State of the finite state machine
Specific 3 Followup Follow up state of the finite state machine
state
Specific 4 Offending Any corrupt byte (depending on the event type)
byte
Specific 5 Header time Duration of the message header in bit times
Bus Bus bus name
Database Database Database in which the corresponding message is de-
fined

8.7 The Bus Statistics Window for Option .LIN


The Bus Statistics Window (also) displays LIN specific data and values.
For Option .LIN the following information are available in the bus statistics window:
• Busload [%]
• Peakload [%]
• Data [fr/s]
• Data [total]
• TransmErr [err/s]
• TransmErr [total]
• CSErr [err/s]
• CSErr [total]
• RcvErr [err/s]
• RcvErr [total]
• SyncErr [err/s]
• SyncErr [total]
• Wakeups [fr/s]
• Wakeups [total]
• Chip State

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


167

9 Option .MOST
In this chapter you get a short introduction in CANoe.MOST resp. DENoe.MOST.
The most important and most used functions, features and applications are intro-
duced here.

9.1 Installation Procedure


The CANoe/DENoe Option .MOST interfaces to the Optolyzer Box of Oasis through a
standalone ActiveX control called ‘Optolyzer Control’ which doesn’t need a license for
the Optolyzer Professional Software.

9.1.1 Prerequisites
The CANoe/DENoe Option .MOST is so far tested under Windows NT 4.0 SP6, Win-
dows 2000 and Windows XP. It works also on Windows 98 and Windows ME. It will
not work on Windows 95 because the ActiveX Control doesn’t work on this operating
system.
You will need
• a CANoe/DENoe Option .MOST license, which is bound to some CAN HW, e.g.
CANcardX,
• an Optolyzer Box (Firmware Version 2.50 or higher),
• the ‘Optolyzer ActiveX Control’ (incl. new license number for the Optolyzer),
• CANcardX driver version 3.4 for optimal time synchronization.

9.1.2 Procedure
• Install the Optolyzer ActiveX Control on your PC. The appropriate installation
program for your operation system is provided in the folder
\Drivers\Optolyzer\OptoControl of the CD. Since CANoe was devel-
oped and tested with the OptoControl versions from the CD, we strongly rec-
ommend to install this driver versions.
• Set the COM Port Settings for all COM Ports used with an Optolyzer Box within
the Windows Control Panel, to 115200,8,n,1,Hardware
• Install Option MOST in a directory of your choice
• Enable ‘Synchronize CAN hardware’ on the global settings section in the con-
figuration dialog of the CAN driver
• Enter the license code for the Optolyzer ActiveX Control in the [Install] tab of
the MOST Hardware Configuration dialog (Menu: Configure | MOST hardware
configuration…)
If Optolyzer Professional is installed, the license number for the ActiveX control may
be entered via this tool and will then be stored in the windows registry. Multiple li-
cense numbers can be stored in this way and will all be checked while opening the
connection to the Optolyzer box.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


168

9.2 Profile
There are some configuration parameters for the Optolyzer in the profile CAN.INI in
the executable directory of CANoe/DENoe.
For each channel enter a section [OptolyzerX] in CAN.INI, where X stands for the
channel which should be configured by this section.
The selection of the COM port and the license key can comfortably be entered
through the MOST Hardware Configuration dialog. However, the values will still be
stored in CAN.INI because these are PC related settings which should not be moved
to other PCs by using the configuration file on other PCs.
[Optolyzer1]
// Interface
// 1=COM1, 2=COM2
ComPort = 1

// Licence number for operation without OptolyzerPro


// (If Optolyzer Pro is installed with a licence for using
// the OptoControl with the connected Optolyzer Box no en-
try is needed)
Licence=89AB0123CDEF4567

9.3 Timestamps
CANoe uses a resolution of 10 µs for the timestamps of events. The Optolyzer box
generates only timestamps with a resolution of 1 ms, thus all shown timestamps re-
lated to MOST events have at maximum this resolution, even if shown in a higher
resolution.
All events received before the time synchronization could calculate a valid offset be-
tween CAN bus and MOST ring are suppressed. Therefore the first MOST frames
shown in a trace window may have a timestamp several seconds after measurement
start.

9.4 Synchronized timestamp


The unit of this timestamp is 10 µs, with 0 at the start of measurement.
This timestamp is synchronized with the timestamps on the CAN bus by a software
algorithm.
Due to the algorithm, the accuracy of this timestamp might vary slightly, but the time-
stamps can be used for calculations across more than one bus system or across mul-
tiple MOST channels.
Technical reasons let this algorithm work better with the spy mode of the Optolyzer
box.
In node mode time synchronization may be impaired by sending MOST frames from
CAPL nodes.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


169

9.5 Original timestamp


This is the original timestamp generated by the MOST hardware. Only the unit is
changed to 10 µs and an offset is subtracted, so that the measurement start again
has approximately a timestamp of 0.
For higher precision use this timestamp for calculations concerning periods of time
only in the MOST system on one channel. The offset between original timestamps
from different MOST channels may vary with each measurement start. But provided
that the MOST channels are derived from a single MOST ring, the offset stays con-
stant during the measurement, due to the synchronization of the MOST devices to
the timing master in the ring.
If different MOST channels of CANoe are connected to different MOST rings (with
different timing masters) each MOST channel has its own time base. The original
timestamps will diverge in this case. Therefore the MOST channels are also synchro-
nized which will affect only the synchronized timestamp.

9.6 Time Synchronization Accuracy


The accuracy of the synchronization between MOST channels is typically +/- 1 ms,
between a MOST and a CAN channel is around +/- 2 ms.
These statements are based on measurements with a desktop PC with a Pentium III
450 MHz, Windows NT 4.0 (SP6) and a CANcardX with driver version 3.0. The Op-
tolyzer boxes were operated in spy mode with a continuous bus load of up to
166 frames/s. (With more than 166 frames/s the buffer of the Optolyzer box starts to
fill up). The CAN bus was operated with two active channels at 1 MBit/s and a bus-
load of 30 % on each channel.
Due to adaptive algorithms the full accuracy of the synchronization is achieved only
after a few seconds after measurement start. If synchronization is a critical point
within the measurement application, start the measurement a couple of seconds be-
fore the condition which shall be analyzed occurs.
If CANoe is used to trigger the interesting condition on the bus, use interactive trig-
gering e.g. by operating a panel or an interactive generator block or use a CAPL
timer started at measurement start to allow a delayed trigger condition.

9.7 Database Support


CANoe.MOST offers two ways of describing the data structure on the MOST frames.
Known from version 0.95 is the description of messages in a CANdb++ database.
This is still the only way to have database support for MOST in CAPL. In CAPL, mes-
sages can be identified and parameters can be accessed by names defined in the
CANdb++ database. Additionally this way is used to show parameter values in the
Data and Graphics Windows and to statically translate physical addresses into device
names.
Unfortunately the CANdb++ database does not allow the description of all data for-
mats used in MOST systems.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


170

Therefore CANoe.MOST allows the import of an XML description of the function cata-
log. This feature is used to display a disassembled view of the messages in the Trace
Window or to assemble frames with the Interactive Generator for MOST.

9.7.1 Function Catalogs in XML


The function blocks of MOST devices are described in XML Function Catalogs. CA-
Noe.MOST imports these function blocks from XML files. The structure of the XML
Function Catalog file is described in the Document Type Definition (DTD). Look at the
beginning of the XML Function Catalog file to determine the name of the DTD file. It
should be part of the tag <!DOCTYPE>. To work properly the XML Function Catalog
has to be consistent with Version 6.03 of the DTD of the MOST Coopera-tion. The
latest XML Function Catalog as well as the DTD is available in the member area of
the MOST Cooperation website (http://www.mostcooperation.com).

9.7.1.1 Using XML Function Catalogs in CANoe/DENoe


Similar to the usage of CANdb databases, the XML Function Catalogs can be as-
signed to individual busses in the System View window of the Simulation setup.
Therefore, right-click on Databases in the System View window. Select Add in the
context menu. The Open File dialog appears, where the XML file can be selected
(choose file type *.xml).
CANoe/DENoe starts the import of the XML file as soon as the file is assigned to the
bus.

9.7.1.2 Setting disassembly mode


With CANdb and XML there are two sources for the description of MOST messages.
The key DisassemblyMode ([MOST] section) in the file CAN.INI (Exec32 directory
of your CANoe installation) controls which database should be used for message
disassembly in the Trace Window. The following modes are available:
0 CANdb only
1 XML Function Catalogs only
2 CANdb, XML Function Catalogs
(if CANdb does not describe the message, the XML Function Catalog will be
used)
3 XML Function Catalogs, CANdb
(if the message is not described in the XML Function Catalog, CANdb will be
used)

9.7.1.3 Validation
During the import, CANoe parses the XML file and validates its structure against the
DTD. In cases the XML does not match the DTD or the DTD file is unavailable the
import will stop.
However, to support as many function catalogs as possible, CANoe allows the us-
age of XML files without DTD. Therefore, the following steps have to be performed:

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


171

• Make sure, the DTD file is not referenced within the XML catalog by removing
the <!DOCTYPE> tag at the beginning of your XML file.
• Disable the validation by setting the entry FCatImportValidate to 0 in the
CAN.INI file ([MOST] section):
[MOST]
FCatImportValidate = 0

Note: Using XML catalogs without any DTD or without the official DTD of the
MOST Cooperation might lead to unpredictable import results!

9.7.1.4 Import Errors and Warnings


The XML import of CANoe writes logical and semantical errors and other inconsis-
tencies in the XML Function Catalog into an ASCII file if the entry FCatImport-
Log=1 is set in the [MOST] section of the profile CAN.INI. The name of the ASCII file
is determined by the name of the XML file concerned (same directory, suffix .xml
replaced by .log).

9.7.1.5 Using more than one XML Function Catalog


CANoe.MOST can use several XML Function Catalogs simultaneously.
If a MOST message is defined in more than one XML Function Catalog, the descrip-
tion with the highest precision will be used. The precision of a message description is
internally defined as follows (4 = highest precision):
0 FBlock of message is not described
1 only FBlock of message is described
2 message is described up to ‘Function’
3 message is described up to ‘Operation’
4 at least one parameter of the message is described
If a message is described in XML Function Catalogs and in CANdb databases, CA-
Noe.MOST uses the description according to the disassembly mode:
• Disassembly mode 2: If a message is described in a CANdb database, this de-
scription will be used.
• Disassembly mode 3: If the message description in the XML Function Catalog is
of precision 3 or 4, this description will be used. Otherwise the description in the
CANdb database will be used.

9.7.1.6 Reading and Rereading XML files


Importing a XML Function Catalog needs some time according to the size of the XML
file. It needs some memory during parsing as well (approximately three to five times
the size of the XML file). Therefore CANoe.MOST holds all information of the XML file
in memory after parsing (the amount of memory needed after the parsing process is
finished is approximately one to three times the size of the XML file).
This memory is only released when

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


172

• there is no XML Function Catalog assigned to the current configuration, or


• a XML Catalog is removed from the configuration.

The XML Function Catalog will be reread from file when


• a new configuration is loaded with another XML Function Catalog, or
• a new XML file is assigned to a bus in the Simulation Setup (CANoe/DENoe
only), or
• an assigned CANdb database is saved with a changed MostXMLFile attribute
(CANalyzer/DENalyzer only), or
• a CANdb database with a new MostXMLFile attribute is assigned (CANa-
lyzer/DENalyzer only), or
• at start of measurement if the content of the XML file was modified since the
last import.
During XML Function Catalog import it is not possible for CANoe to process com-
mands therefore a spinning hour class will be displayed.

9.7.2 CANdb++
If a new database for MOST is needed, the best way to generate one is to use
MostTemplate.dbc. You can choose this template by creating a new database within
CANdb++ (menu File, Create Database). By starting with a copy of this template all
settings needed for a MOST database are prepared correctly.
Another possibility is to generate a database from a XML file. Therefore, the import
tool XML2DBC is supplied with the Option MOST. The tool imports XML descriptions
of function blocks compliant to the DTD of the MOST cooperation. This utility and
further documentation can be found in the Exec32\Util_MOST folder of your CA-
Noe.MOST installation.

9.7.3 CAPL
CAPL only supports CANdb databases so far.

9.7.4 Frame
The database support is based on the structure of the MOST frames described in the
MOST Function Catalog. According to this catalog the data section of every MOST
frame has the following structure:

Byte 0 1 2 + High- Low- High- Low- 5–16


Nibble(3) Nibble(3) Nibble(4) Nibble(4)
Name FBlockID Instance- FunctionID Operation- TelID TelLen Parameters
ID Type
Numeric 31 00 201 0 0 6 ...
Symbolic Audio- 00 Time- Set 0 6 Pos, ...
DiscPlayer Position

Table 1: Layout of function catalog message

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


173

9.7.4.1 Lookup Key


The data structure in the bytes 5-16 is identified uniquely if FBlockId, FunctionId and
OperationType are known. In order to associate a MOST frame with a database entry
in CANdb, an identifier or lookup key is needed. By combining the values of FBlockId,
FunctionId and OperationType to an identifier, this unique association between data-
base entry and data structure is accomplished.
The ID for a MOST frame therefore is calculated as follows:
ID = (FBlockId << 16) + (FunctionId << 4) + OperationType
ID = (msg[0] << 16) + (msg[2] <<8) + msg[3] = 0x312010 (for the example above)

9.7.4.2 Message Name


Additionally each database entry for a message can be identified by a unique name
with a maximum length of 32 characters. These names can consist of any letter 0…9,
a…z, A…Z and the underscore. For easy navigation between name and Identifier a
concatenation of FBlockName, FunctionName and Operation is recommended,
where any part shall be abbreviated so that the maximum length shall not be ex-
ceeded.
Name = FBlockName + ‘_’ + FunctionName + ‘_’ + Operation

9.7.4.3 Message Attributes


There are attributes assigned to every database entry for a MOST frame. The attrib-
utes FBlock, Function and OpType are used for the disassembly in the trace window.
They allow to circumvent the limitation of the name length to 32 characters and
should be set to the original names defined in the function catalog.
Any function in the catalog may belong to one of the function classes Method or
Property. The disassembly of the OperationType depends on to which class the func-
tion belongs to. For a correct disassembly the attribute FunctionClass must be set to
the appropriate value for each message. The default value is property.
For later use the attributes MostSrcAdr, MostDestAdr and InstId are provided. These
attributes may be set to the typical value for the concerned message.

9.7.4.4 Parameters
For the disassembly of parameters mapped on MOST frames, signals can be placed
on the corresponding database entry. For the exact procedure see the online help of
CANdb++.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


174

Figure 86: Signal layout of CANdb++ message

The counting of bytes for the layout view of the message starts with 0 at byte 5 of the
MOST frame. This has to be taken into account during placement of signals onto a
database entry for a MOST message. The first parameter ‘PosX’ shown in Table 1
has a start bit of 0 and is shown in byte 0 of the layout view, although it is placed in
the bytes 5 and 6 of the MOST frame (see Table 1).
In this release CANdb++ supports parameters with a fixed length only. Parameters
where the length is determined at runtime, e.g. with zero terminated strings, are not
supported, because the position of the following parameters cannot be determined at
design time.
In addition, only signals up to a length of 12 bytes and a placement within the bytes 5
to 16 can be defined. Segmented messages as through the application message ser-
vice are not supported in this release.

9.7.5 HW Configuration
The data structure described above relates only to the application layer of a MOST
system. It does not contain any information about the HW structure of the MOST ring.
In MOST nodes the NetServices translate the addressing from the application layer
addresses (FBlock, FunctionId,…) to physical addresses. In the recent release of
CANoe Option MOST there’s no NetServices support available.
The translation of physical addresses can be achieved by adding network nodes to
the database. Each network node has the attribute ‘MostNodeAdr’. CANoe.MOST
translates the physical address into a symbolic device name by matching the address
with the value of the node attribute and displaying the name of the corresponding
network node.
The same procedure allows the translation of group addresses into group names. For
each group address a network node with a suitable name could be entered into the
database (attribute ‘MostGroupAdr’).

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


175

9.8 Interactive Generator Block MOST


The interactive generator block MOST (IG MOST) can be used to configure and send
messages while the measurement is running.
Advantages:
• quick, improvisational manipulation of the measurement
• no CAPL programming necessary
MOST messages will be included in the send list of the configuration dialog of the IG
MOST. Within this dialog the messages can be configured, filled with data, and as-
signed to a MOST channel. By one button click a message can be send.
Within the IG MOST all informations about messages and their parameters are taken
from the assigned XML function catalogs. Therefore the MOST messages can be
selected from a tree representation of the function catalogs.
To send MOST messages to the MOST bus insert an IG MOST block
• in the measurement setup/send branch using the context menu of the hot spots
(CANalyzer)
• in the simulation setup using the context menu of the simulated busses (CA-
Noe)
To manipulate the analysis without sending MOST messages to the bus insert an IG
MOST block in the measurement setup before the appropriate analyze block (CANa-
lyzer and CANoe).
Please see the online help to learn more about the IG MOST.

9.9 Trace Window


For MOST frames the trace windows offers the following display options:
Name Description
Timestamp Synchronized timestamp
Channel Channel information with the prefix ‘M’
Identifier Lookup key as described in chapter 9.7
Name Name of the frame provided by the database
ID/Name Depending on the general display option:
Symbolic mode: Name
Numeric mode: Display of lookup key (see chapter 9.7)
Dir Received frame (Rx), transmitted frame (Tx) or requested transmis-
sion (TxRequest)
Data 17 Byte application data
RType The message type can be Normal, RemRead, RemWrite, Alloc,
Dealloc or GetSource. This column does not give any information
about the addressing mode any more.
Source Symbolic mode: Device name, if available (see chapter 9.7)
Numeric mode: Source Address

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


176

Destination Symbolic mode: Device name, if available (see chapter 9.7)


Numeric mode: Destination Address
Original Time Original timestamp generated by the hardware interface, with an
offset of 0 at measurement start (see also chapter 9.3)
Type Type of MOST event (Normal, RemRead, RemWrite, Alloc, Deal-
loc, GetSource), (Prepared to handle MOST packets and AMS
messages)
Disassembly Symbolic interpretation of MOST frames, according to the associ-
ated database, including FBlock, FunctionName and Operation-
Type.
The remaining bytes of the frame will be displayed numerically
State State information of the received or transmitted message:
bit0 (valid for Dir=Rx only): 0 - bus not active (NAc), 1 - bus active
bit1 (valid for Dir=Rx only): 1 - unlock within this message (Unl)
bit6 (normal and RemRead/Write Tx only):
transmission result: 0 – OK, 1 – transmission failed (TxF)
(meanings correspond with the description in the online help of the
OptoControl)
AckNack Acknowledgement information of the received or transmitted mes-
sage:
bit0 set: no response (NoResp) (Spy message only)
bit1 set: valid receipt (Valid) (Spy message only)
bit2 set: CRC Error (CRCError) (Spy message only)
bit3 set: receive buffer full (RxBfFull) (Spy message only)
bit4 set: acknowledged (Ack) (normal and RemRead/Write Tx only)
bit5 set: not acknowledged (NAck) (normal and RemRead/Write Tx
only)
(meanings correspond with the description in the online help of the
OptoControl)
CRC CRC code (see online help of the OptoControl)
ASCII ASCII dump of the 17 data bytes of the MOST frames
DbType Type of database the MOST frame is disassembled with. This is
‘DBC’ for CANdb++ database or ‘XML’ if the disassembly is based
on the XML description of the MOST Function Catalog.
The Trace Window shows a tree view in ‘overwriting mode’ or when paused. Lines
with MOST frames corresponding to database messages to which signals are map-
ped, show a small ‘+’ at the beginning. This indicates that this part of the tree view
can be extended and the sub-tree shows the names and values of the parameters
mapped to the MOST frame.
Parameters are only interpreted, when the high nibble of byte 4, containing the TelId,
equals to 0 or 1. Only then the concerned frame contains the bytes corresponding to
the signal description in the database. In other cases the MOST frame belongs to a
segmented message, for which a disassembly is not implemented yet.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


177

9.10 Busstatistic Window


The busstatistic window shows some statistical information like frame/s,
frames(total), number of changes of light&lock and so on. These values are calcu-
lated by the Vector MOST driver.
For a channel operated in node mode, only the frames addressed to this node are
included in the calculation. However the values are calculated before any filter or o-
ther CAPL node can influence the number of the received frames.
The sampling rate with which the statistic analysis is processed may be configured in
the profile CAN.INI:
[MOST]
// Sampling rate of bus statistic (value in ms)
// -1: Off, 100-.. valid values (default=1000)
Statistic = 1000

9.11 Graphic- & Data Window


The database support by CANdb++ allows the display of parameters defined in the
database in the graphic- respectively in the data window. By calling the configuration
dialog of either of these windows and selecting ‘New Signal’ a signal selection dialog
will popup. This dialog shows all associated databases with the defined messages
and the signals/parameters mapped onto the messages.
After the selection of a message by name (see chapter 9.7), a signal can be added to
the window. The value of the signal will be shown during measurement either as
graph or as numerical value. The value will be updated whenever a MOST frame with
the same lookup key is received.
No XML support is implemented for these Windows so far.

9.12 CAPL
For easy use, the MOST commands are integrated in CAPL.

9.12.1 Initialization of Message Variables


There are two types of message variables for MOST.
mostMessage…variables describe function catalog conform MOST frames.
mostRawMessage…variables describe MOST frames, which do not fit into the func-
tion catalog structure (e. g. RemRead, RemWrite, Alloc, Dealloc, GetSource).
Read the online help of CANoe to see how message variables are initialized, applied
and send on the network.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


178

9.12.2 Selectors
The selectors provide access to the data of message and event variables.
Keyword Description Range/Valid Access limitations
values
for mostMessages and mostRawMessages:
DLC Data Length Code (TelLen for 0…0xF
mostMessages)
DIR Direction of transmission Tx, Rx,
TxRequest
SA Source address 0…0xFFFF
DA Destination address 0…0xFFFF
MsgChannel Transmission channel 1…4
MsgCRC CRC code (see online help of 0…0xFF read only, Spy
the OptoControl)
ACK Acknowledgement information 0…0xFF read only, Spy
(see chapter 9.8)
Most_RType Message type (Normal, Rem- 0…0x4
Read, RemWrite, Alloc, Dealloc)
Most_State Status information (see chapter 0…0xFF read only
9.8)
Most_IsSpy Set to 1 for spy messages 0, 1 read only
BYTE(idx) Provides access to the data 0…0xFF
bytes of the MOST frame.
mostMessage: 0 ≤ idx ≤ 11
mostRawMessage: 0 ≤ idx ≤ 16
(see table below)
Time Synchronized time (unit: 10µs) read only
MsgOrigTime Unsynchronized hardware time read only
stamp (unit: 10µs)
for mostMessages only:
ID Message ID (CANdb lookup key, 0…0xFFFFF
see 9.7.4.1) F
Most_InstanceI Instance ID 0…0xFF
D
Most_TelID TelID 0…0xF
for mostLightLockError
Most_Light Light state of controller 0, 1 read only,
mostLightLockError
Most_Lock Lock state of controller 0, 1 read only,

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


179

mostLightLockError
Most_Error Error state of controller 0, 1 read only,
mostLightLockError
Time Synchronized time (unit: 10µs) read only
MsgOrigTime Unsynchronized hardware time read only
stamp (unit: 10µs)

Byte contents of mostRawMessages (see data sheet of MOST transceiver OS8104):


Byte RemoteRead RemoteWrite Alloc Dealloc GetSource
RType=1 RType=2 RType=3 RType=4 RType=5
0 rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd
1 MAP MAP Request CL CL
2 rsvd LENGTH rsvd rsvd rsvd
3 D0 D0 Answer1 Answer1 rsvd
4 D1 D1 Answer2 0x0 rsvd
5 D2 D2 P0 rsvd rsvd
6 D3 D3 P1 rsvd NPR
7 D4 D4 P2 rsvd rsvd
8 D5 D5 P3 rsvd GA
9 D6 D6 P4 rsvd NAH
10 D7 D7 P5 rsvd NAL
11 rsvd rsvd P6 rsvd rsvd
12 rsvd rsvd P7 rsvd rsvd
13…16 rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd

9.12.3 Event Procedures

9.12.3.1 on mostMessage
The event procedure on mostMessage is called on the receipt of a function catalog
conform MOST frame (RType=Normal).
The key word this and the message selectors (see section 9.12.2) are available
within the event procedures, to access the data of the message that has just been
received. The command output(this) can be used for forwarding the message in
a node chain.
The following examples show various modes of the event procedure on mostMes-
sage:
on mostMessage *

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


180

React to all MOST messages


on mostMessage 0x312010
React to message 0x312010 (function block 0x31, function 0x201, operation 0x0)
on mostMessage AudioPlayer_TimePosition_Set
React to message AudioPlayer_TimePosition_Set defined in a CANdb database.
on mostMessage MsgChannel1.*
React to all messages received by channel 1.
on mostMessage MsgChannel1.0x312010
React to message 0x312010 if it is received by channel 1.
on mostMessage 0x22104C,0x312010-0x31201F
React to messages 0x22104C and 0x31201c through 0x31201F.

9.12.3.2 on mostRawMessage
on mostRawMessage is called on the receipt of other MOST frames. These are
RemoteRead, RemoteWrite, Alloc, Dealloc and GetSource. See section 9.12.2 for the
applicable selectors. The command output(this) can be used for forwarding the
message in a node chain.

9.12.3.3 on mostLightLockError
On controller events on mostLightLockError is called. Light, Lock and Error
events will be forwarded automatically.

9.12.4 Functions

9.12.4.1 MostGetFBlockID, MostGetFunctionID, MostGetOpType


long MostGetFBlockID(mostMessage msg)
long MostGetFunctionID(mostMessage msg)
long MostGetOpType(mostMessage msg)
These functions return the FBlockID, FunctionID or OpType of the frame.
Availability: Simulation Setup (any time), Measurement Setup

9.12.4.2 MostSetFBlockID, MostSetFunctionID, MostSetOpType


void MostSetFBlockID(mostMessage msg, long value)
void MostSetFunctionID(mostMessage msg, long value)
void MostSetOpType(mostMessage msg, long value)
Set the FBlockID, FunctionID or OpType of the frame.
Note: Since the FBlockID, FunctionID and OpType are part of the message ID this
functions change the ID as well (see section 9.7.4.1).
Availability: Simulation Setup (any time), Measurement Setup

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


181

9.12.5 Hardware API

9.12.5.1 Optolyzer Operation Mode


long MostSetOptoMode(long channel,long optoMode)
Sets the operation mode of the Optolyzer to the specified value.
optoMode = 1: Spy Mode
optoMode = 4: Slave Mode
optoMode = 6: Master Mode
Refer to the OptoControl helpfile for further explanations of the values for optoMode.
This function only works in the ‘Prestart’ section of the CAPL program.
long MostGetOptoMode(long channel)
Returns the operation mode of the Optolyzer connected to the given channel.
Availability: Simulation Setup (only in ‘Prestart’ section)

9.12.5.2 Node Mode

Setting Addresses of the Optolyzer


long MostSetOwnAdr(long channel, long grpadr, long nodeadr)
This function sets the node address and group address of the Optolyzer to the speci-
fied values.
Availability: Simulation Setup (at any time, not in StopMeasurement)

Retrieving Addresses of the Optolyzer


long MostGetNodeAdr(long channel)
long MostGetGroupAdr(long channel)
long MostGetNodePosAdr(long channel)
Return Node, Group or Node Position Address of the Optolyzer connected to the
specified channel.
Availability: Simulation Setup (at any time, not in StopMeasurement)

Optolyzer Status
long MostGetLight(long channel)
long MostGetLock(long channel)
long MostSetLight(long channel, long mode)
Get and set the Optolyzer states.
Availability: Simulation Setup (at any time, not in StopMeasurement)

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


182

9.12.5.3 Spy Filter

Filter Mode
long MostSetHWFilter(long channel, long mode)
mode = 1: HW filter on
mode = 0: HW filter off
Effects the Optolyzer only when in spy mode.
long MostGetHWFilter(long channel)
Returns 1 if hardware filter is active, otherwise 0.
Availability: Simulation Setup (at any time, not in StopMeasurement)

AND Filter
long MostSetAndFilter(
long channel,
long arb,
long targetAdr,
long sourceAdr,
long type,
byte msg[17],
long crc,
long ack
)
Effects the Optolyzer only when in spy mode. See the online help of the OptoControl
help file for information about how AND and XOR filter masks work together. The
there described mask string is assembled appropriately from the parameters of the
function ‘MostSetAndFilter’.
long MostGetAndFilter(
long channel,
long arb,
long targetAdr,
long sourceAdr,
long type,
byte msg[17],
long crc,
long ack
)
Retrieves the status of the AND filter.
Availability: Simulation Setup (at any time, not in StopMeasurement)

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


183

XOR Filter
long MostSetXorFilter(
long channel,
long arb,
long targetAdr,
long sourceAdr,
long type,
byte msg[17],
long crc,
long ack
)
Set the XOR filter. Effects the Optolyzer only when in spy mode.
long MostGetXorFilter(
long channel,
long arb,
long targetAdr,
long sourceAdr,
long type,
byte msg[17],
long crc,
long ack
)
Retrieves the status of the XOR filter.
Availability: Simulation Setup (at any time, not in StopMeasurement)
9.12.6 Error Codes of CAPL functions

9.12.6.1 kMostTxQueueFull = -6
The transmit queue of 256 Messages is full, while trying to send another message.

9.12.6.2 kMostWrongOptoMode = -5
The function cannot be called in this optolyzer mode. Either trying to send messages
in spy mode or configuring HW filter in node mode.

9.12.6.3 kMostWrongThread = -4
The function cannot be called from this part of the setup, due to the thread affinity of
ActiveX.
Not all functions can be called from CAPL nodes in the analyzing setup

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


184

9.12.6.4 kMostIllegalTime = -3
The function was called in the wrong phase of the measurement. For example the
optolyzer mode can only be changed in the ‘prestart’ function.

9.12.6.5 kMostNoConnection = -2
The Driver got no connection to the Optolyzer box or OptoControl. Check whether
everything is installed properly, the Optolyzer box is connected to the PC and
switched on. Check also whether the CAN.INI file configures the correct COM port
and interface name for the connected Optolyzer.

9.12.6.6 kMostInvalidChannel = -1
The operation was requested for an invalid channel number.

9.12.6.7 kErrDrvOK = 0
No Error occurred.

9.13 Demo Configurations CANoe/DENoe


Demo configurations demonstrating MOST features can be found in the De-
mo_MOST_CN’ folder of your CANoe/DENoe installation. Detailed descriptions of the
demos are provided within the configuration comments (File│Configuration com-
ment… menu).

9.13.1 MOSTSpy
This is a very simple configuration operating a single Optolyzer Box in spy mode,
which allows to analyze a MOST ring very quickly.
If needed, a second channel can be activated (see ‘channel usage’) operated as de-
fault in master mode to provide a timing master for the MOST ring.

9.13.2 MOSTGeneral
This demo configuration has been developed and tested with the MOST starter kit:
• 2 Optolyzer Boxes
• 1 MOST MediaPlayer
• 1 MOST Speak
All devices have remained in the configuration in which they have been delivered.
If these devices are not present in the MOST ring, then the nodes ‘MOST Speak’ and
‘MediaPlayer’ in the simulation setup can be switched from ‘real’ mode to ‘simulated’.
By doing this, basic functionality of the real devices is simulated like ‘start’ ‘stop’ and
the transmission of timing information.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


185

9.13.3 MOST XML Catalog


The demo replays a logging file in offline mode to show the disassembly capabilities
of the Trace window. Therefore the configuration imports two sample XML Function
Catalogs. No real hardware is required for running the demo.

9.14 Known Problems & Trouble Shooting

9.14.1 Measurement Windows frequently disabled


In spite of a moderate bus load on the used CAN or MOST channels, the measure-
ment windows frequently show a notification ‘disabled’ in the title bars.
Please check:
• Are the COM port settings in the windows control panel correct?
They must be 115.2 kBaud, 8 Bit, no parity, 1 Stop Bit, Hardware flow control

9.14.2 CANoe doesn’t receive any MOST Frames


Please check at first:
• Does the Optolyzer have light&lock
• Are there MOST frames to receive
• Is the Optolyzer addressed (either in Spy Mode, or with correct node or group
address)
The mode is configured either in the MOST hardware configuration dialog or in
a CAPL program.
• In spy mode: Is the HW Filter switched off?
• Is there a message ‘MOST x: Obsolete Firmware? (Version >2.41c required)’ in
the write window?
This indicates that the time synchronization couldn’t startup. An obsolete firm-
ware version of the Optolyzer box may be the reason.
If sending MOST frames and receiving Tx acknowledgements works well, but still no
MOST frames are received, the firmware of the Optolyzer box may be obsolete. For
usage of CANoe .MOST at least version 2.50 of the firmware is needed.

9.14.3 CANoe doesn’t receive some MOST Frames


When running an Optolyzer box in node mode (Master, Slave), only messages sent
to the node’s address will be received. Furthermore, acknowledged frames will be
processed, only. Not acknowledged frames can solely be detected in Spy mode.
While driving the Optolyzer box with high load (simultaneous transmission and recep-
tion of multiple messages), the receiver (Optolyzer) may need several send retries
before it acknowledges a reception to the sender. Adjust the number of retries at
sender site.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


186

9.14.4 Warning ‘2 Tx receipt(s) got lost’


When sending MOST frames in quick succession through the Optolyzer box, the
driver may lose Tx receipts for sending requests. Therefore, CANoe cannot affirm
whether a frame has been sent or not. The warning ‘N Tx receipt(s) got lost’ will be
written in the Write window as soon as an incoming Tx receipt indicates, that N for-
mer Tx receipts are missing.
In general, this warning occurs on send requests to a node address that does not
exist in the MOST ring. Please check the destination address and reduce the sending
frequency.

9.14.5 After several minutes CANoe doesn’t receive or send any MOST Frames
After several minutes CANoe doesn’t receive or send any MOST Frames. The CAN
related features of CANoe still work stable.
Please check:
• Are the COM port settings in the windows control panel correct?
They must be 115.2 kBaud, 8 Bit, no parity, 1 Stop Bit, Hardware flow control
• There may be problems with the installation of the OptoControl ActiveX Control
Please try to reinstall the OptoControl. First deinstall OptoControl using Win-
dows (Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Software). Ensure that there are no
entries belonging to the OptoControl left in the registry (search for "*opto*").
Than install OptoControl again. Use the version provided on the CANoe CD ac-
cording to the used operating system (on the CD under Dri-
vers\Optolyzer\OptoControl).

9.14.6 Error ‘Port COM1 busy for channel 1’


If the ActiveX can not open a connection to an Optolyzer box, this message appears
at measurement start. The following reasons can cause this problem:
• No Optolyzer is connected to the COM port configured, or
• the Optolyzer is switched off, or
• the COM port is already used by another application.
If the Optolyzer was just recently connected to this computer or to CANoe Option
MOST and is therefore started for the first time with CANoe, just try to start the mea-
surement again or try switching the Optolyzer off and on again.
Connection problems to the Optolyzer may also be solved by a re-start of CANoe.

9.14.7 Error ‘No valid license for channel 1’


CANoe cannot establish the connection to the Optolyzer interface box through the
Optolyzer ActiveX Control because of an invalid license key. Please check:
• The license key must include the activation for the hardware and the ActiveX
Control.
• The key has been entered correctly in the Install register of the MOST Hard-
ware Configuration dialog. It must not contain white spaces or dashes.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


187

9.14.8 Weird Spurious Events from MOST bus


In some rare cases there might be some spurious events from the MOST bus. This
may include invalid timestamps or even random data. There are some plausibility
checks performed on the timestamps which should detect these events. In order to
avoid an impairment of the time synchronization the timestamps of these events will
be set to the recent simulation time of CANoe. The events will be shown in the trace
window and logging file and will be reported in the write window as ‘weird time
stamp’.
This problem seems to be provoked by a high overall load (CAN and MOST) or a
slow PC. Please try to reduce the load by
• Disabling unused analysis functions of CANoe
• using HW filtering of the Optolyzer in spy mode
• activating acceptance masks in the CAN chip setup
• using a faster PC
This problem is difficult to reproduce and seems to be related with the ActiveX con-
trol. It will be investigated further and solved as soon as possible.

9.14.9 Transmit Acknowledgement


When using older versions of the Optolyzer ActiveX Control (versions before 2.1.1),
transmit acknowledgements for the transmission of a MOST control frame do not
have a hardware generated timestamp. So the ‘origtimestamp’ is set to zero and the
synchronized timestamp is set to an estimated value depending on the time of recep-
tion of the acknowledgement.
These timestamps are shown with a trailing ‘?’ in the trace window to indicate that
these events are not exactly in chronological order with the other events.

9.14.10 Timestamps of CAN and MOST constantly drift apart


Time synchronization only works with CAN driver versions from 3.4 and later. Please
install the drivers enclosed in this distribution, or visit our web site at
http://www.vector-informatik.de to download the drivers.
Ensure that the check box ‘Synchronize Hardware’ is enabled in the Global Settings
tab of the CAN Driver Configuration dialog.

9.14.11 Measurement stops after configuration of trace window


In some cases the measurement will be stopped immediately if the configuration dia-
log of a trace window is opened during measurement. This problem can be traced
back to an improper installation of the ActiveX control OptoControl.
Please try to reinstall the OptoControl. First deinstall OptoControl using Windows
(Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Software). Ensure that there are no entries
belonging to the OptoControl left in the registry (search for "*opto*"). Than install Op-
toControl again. Use the version provided on the CANoe CD according to the used
operating system (on the CD under Drivers\Optolyzer\OptoControl).

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


188

9.15 XML Engine


CANoe/DENoe/CANalyzer/DENalyzer uses Xerces-C++ for parsing XML files. Please
notice the following license of Xerces:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/)."
Copyright (c) 2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
• The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must in-
clude the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed
by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)." Alternately, this
acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-
party acknowledgments normally appear.
• The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written
permission. For written permission, please contact apache@apache.org.
• Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may
"Apache" appear in their name, without prior written permission of the Apache
Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR
ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf
of the Apache Software Foundation, and was originally based on software copyright
(c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc., http://www.ibm.com . For more in-
formation on the Apache Software Foundation, please see <http://www.apache.org/>.

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


189

10 Option .FlexRay
In this chapter you get a short introduction in CANoe.FlexRay bzw. DENoe.Flexray.
The most important and most used functions, features and applications are intro-
duced here.

Note: Please refer to the online help for further details.

The FlexRay option offers extensive capabilities for analyzing distributed real-time
control systems with FlexRay. The service module is available for the connection to
FlexRay networks.
With the FlexRay option, you are able to
• receive,
• display,
• analyze and
• send FlexRay frames.

10.1 Trace Window for Option .FlexRay


Configuring the Trace window you can (also) choose FlexRay specific fields to be
displayed.
For Option .FlexRay the following columns are available in the trace window:
Field Title Function
Time Time This time stamp is transmitted directly by the Service
Module. Currently there is still no time synchronization
with other bus systems.
In operation with a CAN system the time stamps of the
individual bus systems run on different time refer-
ences.
Channel Chn Defines the transmitting source.
"Fr" means that the frame was received in a FlexRay
network. The number indicates the channel number.
Identifier ID Identifier of received frame
Name Name Symbolic name of the message
DLC DLC Length of the data field
Data Data The data in decimal or hexadecimal representation
Typ Typ Type of event, e.g. transmission error
Error Error Symbolic representation of the FlexRay status
Specific 0 Mux Multiplex bit
Specific 1 Frame Sate State flag of Flexray message

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


190

Specific 2 Schedule Assignment of the frame to the static or dynamic part


of the communication cycle
Specific 3 Low Time Addition to the time display HH:MM:SS in simulated
mode
HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS Absolute time from the measurement start in
hh:mm:ss.000-format (24h)
Diff time Diff time Relative time to the previous event
Bustype Bustype Specification of the bus type (CAN, LIN etc).
J1939-messages are specified as bus type "CAN",
because J1939 is a protocol, not a bus
Send node Send node Specification of the send node, which is defined in the
database for the corresponding message. For J1939
this column is without any content!
Bus Bus bus name
Database Database Database in which the corresponding message is de-
fined

10.2 The Bus Statistics Window for Option .FlexRay


The Bus Statistics Window (also) displays FlexRay specific data and values.
For Option .FlexRay the following information are available in the bus statistics win-
dow:
• Frames [fr/s]
• Frames [total]
• Data [fr/s]
• Data [total]
• Sync [fr/s]
• Sync [total]
• Nullframes [fr/s]
• Nullframes [total]
• Errors [[fr/s]
• Errors [total]

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


191

11 Index

Basic-CAN controller · 79
! Baud rate · 111
Baud rate selection · 86
! Load symbol · 53 Baudrate · 81, 82
binary · 67
< Binary · 66
Binary data · 146
<F10> key · 4
Bit time · 82
Bit timimg · 83
7 Bit timing · 82
72005 · 82, 83 Bitmap · 146, 151, 152
Bitmap editor · 151
Bitmap File Format · 151
8
Bitmap formats · 151
82527 · 82, 83 Bitmap switch · 147
82C200 · 82, 83 Blocking filter · 56, 121
Branches · 8, 88
A Break · 68, 69
Break condition · 68
Acceptance code · 83
Breakpoint · 68
Acceptance filtering · 56, 83, 84, 86
Browser tree · 26, 161
Acceptance filters · 81
BTL cycles · 81, 82
Acceptance mask · 83, 84
Burst · 129
Acknowledge · 83
Bus load · 52, 53, 79, 89, 109, 119
ActiveX control · 149
Bus load measurement · 119
ActiveX control wizard · 149
Bus loading · 52, 55
Activity indicator · 114
Bus parameters · 81
Alarm states · 147
Bus registers · 81
Ambiguities · 113, 163
Bus statistics · 68, 85, 119
Analysis blocks · 54
Bus statistics display · 53
Analysis branch · 55
Bus statistics information · 67, 119
Animate · 68, 69, 70, 99
Bus Statistics Window · 165
Animation factor · 93, 94
Bus Statistics Window · 194
Arranging controls · 147
Bus Timing Register · 82
Array · 162
Busstatistik Fenster · 168, 194
ASCII · 66, 67
Button · 5
Averaging time · 55, 116, 119
Axis options · 103, 104
C
B CallAllOnEnvVar · 59
CAN card · 79
Background bitmaps · 154
CAN channel · 50
Bar-type display · 115
CAN.INI · 45, 53, 67, 69, 86, 157
Basic image · 117

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


192

CANcard · 79 Conversion
CANcardX · 79 Log files · 73
CANdb++ · 7, 33, 46 Converter
CANoe without card · 94 LDF to DBC · 167
CAPL · 3, 36, 41, 59, 64, 76, 79, 87, 95, 122, Copying blocks · 90
136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 159 Cycle time · 55, 115, 129
CAPL Browser · 7, 33, 137 Cyclic update · 55, 65
CAPL compiler · 137
CAPL Generator · 33 D
CAPL node · 139
CAPL program · 86, 95, 136, 157 Data environment variables · 150

Card clock · 91 Data flow · 8, 34, 37, 78, 89, 90, 121, 132, 139,
140, 141, 158
Card driver · 87, 91
Data flow diagram · 8, 37, 43, 88, 89, 90
Channel · 79
Data loss · 52, 53
Channel definition · 50, 51, 79, 80
Data reduction · 55, 68
Check box · 5
Data sink · 122
Chip allocation · 50, 80
Data source · 61, 67, 68, 70, 79, 89, 120, 122
CIF files · 45
Data throughput · 119
Clipboard · 111, 161
Database · 28, 41, 47, 50, 59, 140, 141, 144
cnp file · 144
Database Editor · 33
Color quality · 153
DBC
Color resolution · 153 LDF to DBC Converter · 167
Colors in the Graphics window · 108 Deactivation function · 54
Comment · 121, 163 Decrementer · 130
Comment box · 5 Delay times · 85
Compilation time · 160 Demo version · 36
Compile time · 162 Dialog box · 4
Compiler · 27, 46, 157, 160, 161, 162, 163 Difference cursors · 106
COM-Server · 74 Difference measurement mode · 106
Condition primitives · 70 Display elements · 144
Configuration · 4, 5, 36, 50, 123, 132, 137, DLC · 77
140, 141, 147, 154
DPRAM · 76, 79
Configuration descriptions · 45
Driver options · 67, 85
Configuration file · 38, 44
Drop and drag · 161
Configuration file formats · 45
Drop down list · 5
Configuration management · 45
Configuration options · 37, 90, 109
Context menus · 4 E
Control · 59, 75, 145, 147, 151 End of measurement · 64, 102, 105
Control box · 5 Enviornment variables · 59
Control element · 144 Environment variable · 33, 56, 59, 67, 95, 100
Control elements · 144, 145, 146, 154 Environment variable filter · 140
Control panel · 3, 33 Environment variables · 2, 3, 27, 32, 59, 132,
Control panels · 28, 56 133, 140, 141, 152
Controls · 145 ERROR · 119

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


193

Error frame · 41, 64, 95, 119, 123, 129, 133 Hex-Edit control · 150
Error message · 50, 74, 75, 94 High-load operation · 52
Error messsage · 65 Hotspots · 8, 89
Error Passive · 75
Error-Frame · 119 I
Evaluation branch · 55
Evaluation functions · 61 Import of configuration descriptions · 45

Export Incrementer · 130


Log files · 73 Indicator lamps · 144
Extended identifier · 95 Infinite loop · 91
Extended Identifier · 117 INI file · 45, 53, 67, 69, 74, 86
INI-Datei · 157
Initialization of environment variables · 59
F
Input box · 5, 71, 146
Fenster Input control · 154
Busstatistik Fenster · 168, 194 Integer variable · 26, 27
File format · 161 Interactive generator block · 127
File icon of the log file · 23 Interface card · 8, 86
Fill level indicator · 53 Interrupt · 77
Filter · 8, 37, 47, 89, 90, 122
Filters · 140
K
Fit · 117
Font · 86 Keyboard control · 131
Format entry · 27 Konfiguration
Formats of configurations · 45 LIN Testumgebung · 166
Function block · 90
Function generator · 125 L
Layout · 86
G LDF
Gateway · 156, 157 LDF to DBC Converter · 167

Generator block · 8, 43, 89, 121, 122, 123, Line type · 103
124, 125, 126, 158 Load operation · 52, 53
getValue() · 28, 31 Load situation · 53
Global options · 45 Load transition · 53
Grid · 108, 145 Log file · 132
Grouping of controls · 147 converting · 73
exporting · 73
file icon · 23
H Logging
Hardware configuration · 50 time period of · 64
Help · 7, 84 Logging Export · 73
hexadecimal · 83 Long-duration measurement · 65
Hexadecimal Editor · 150
Hexadecimal field · 151 M
Hexadecimal representation · 151
Main memory · 65

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


194

Man-Machine Interface · 150 output(this) · 139


Measurement configuration · 4 Overflow · 76
Measurement cursor · 105, 106 Overload situation · 53
Measurement point · 104 Overload symbol · 68
Measurement setup · 35, 89, 121, 122, 132,
138, 139, 140, 141
P
Measurement start · 26, 43, 68, 79, 104
Measurement value acquisition · 104 Palette · 153
Menu operation · 4 Panel · 3, 33, 59, 144, 145, 146, 147, 151, 154
Message attribute · 91 Panel configuration · 56
Message display · 53 panel control · 155
Message Explorer · 47, 48, 162 Panel control · 59
Message rate · 116 Panel editor · 3
Messages window · 161 Panel Editor · 33, 56
Mode signal · 125 Panel Generator · 33
Mode-dependent signal · 125 Panel name · 145
Moving blocks · 90 Panel size · 145
Multiplex message · 125 Panels · 56
Multisignal mode · 100, 105 Panes · 26, 161, 162, 163
Multistage switch · 146 PARBROW.INI · 161
Multi-stage switch · 147 PC card · 34, 44, 79, 83
PC-card · 8, 70, 86, 90
N Peak display · 114
Performance · 115, 119
Network node · 27, 28, 86, 87 Performance optimization · 54
Network nodes · 1, 2, 3, 36, 40, 86, 87, 136, Performance wizard · 54
137, 138, 140, 141
inserting · 137 Phase model · 1, 2, 86, 92

Node · 28, 87 Point measurement mode · 105

Node status · 137 Pointer elements · 146

Node type · 137 Post-trigger time · 43, 64

Nodes · 86, 87, 136, 137, 138 Power manager · 74

Notebook · 75 Prescaler · 81

Numbering system · 45 Preselection · 140


Pre-trigger time · 64
Primitive · 70, 71
O Procedure template · 26, 27
Offline mode · 69, 70 Procedures list · 161
Online mode · 43, 61, 69, 70, 79, 89 Program block · 156
Operating instructions · 3 Program start · 8, 37
Operating mode · 6, 92 Project directory · 44
Optimization · 54, 109, 115 Project file · 44
Trace window · 99 Pushbutton · 146, 147
Options button · 5 putValue() · 28, 32
Output mode · 52, 55, 104
output() · 139, 156

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


195

Simulation configuration · 34, 36


R
Simulation dialog · 93
Radio button · 5 Simulation setup · 4, 6, 7, 35, 50, 59, 86, 87,
Raw value · 130 92, 122, 132, 136, 137, 138
Reaction times · 35, 55 Simulation setup window · 86
Real bus · 136 Single-signal mode · 100, 105
Real channel · 50, 79 Single-step mode · 69, 70
Real-time library · 34, 35, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56 SJA 1000 · 79, 82, 83
Receive messages · 91 SJW · 82
Receive time point · 79 Slave mode · 93
Refresh · 55 Slider · 144, 146
Remote frame · 129 Slow motion · 69
Replay block · 122, 132, 133 Stack overflow · 162
Representation formats · 45, 46 Standard deviation · 118
Representation parameters · 112 Standard Layout · 86
Reset · 69 Start · 69
Right mouse button · 4 Start bit · 130
Ring buffer · 34, 35, 52, 53, 54, 65 Start options · 34
runError() · 162 Start value · 59
Run-time error · 162 Statistical report · 52
Rx attribute · 91, 116 Statistics report · 55, 111, 116
Rx buffer overrun · 119 Statistics window · 116
Rx error counter · 119 Status bar · 137
Step · 69

S Stop · 64
stop() · 43, 68
Samples · 82 String environment variables · 150
Sampling point · 81 Switch · 147
Sampling time point · 82 Switch value · 145, 147, 152
Scaling · 117 Switches · 144
scalings · 107 Symbol selection dialog · 163
Search condition · 70 Symbolic databases · 46
Setup · 136 Symbolic triggering · 72
Shortcuts · 131 Synchronization edge · 82
Signal · 47, 72 Synchronization jump width · 82, 83
Signal curve · 103 System color palette · 153
Signal Explorer · 20, 48, 162 System directory · 38
Signal identifier · 113 System loading · 115
Signal response generator · 125 System messages · 111
Signal selection dialog · 103
Signal value · 125
T
Signal-based Logging Export · 73
Simulated bus · 136 Test mode · 154
Simulated nodes · 138 Testing · 1, 3
Simulation · 1, 3, 86, 92, 93, 94 Testumgebung
Konfiguration · 166

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1


196

Text box · 146 trigger() · 157


Text editor · 161 Triggerblock · 68
Text field · 151 Triggering · 64, 157
Three-stage switch · 147 Tx attribute · 91, 116
Time base · 70 Tx error counter · 119
Time basis · 70 TXREQUEST · 85
Time resolution · 74, 94 TxRq attribute · 91
Time stamp · 91, 97
Time window · 62, 64 U
Timeout · 75, 78
Timer · 156 Undo function · 81

Toolbar · 27, 102, 160, 162


Trace window · 94, 164, 193 V
Optimization · 99
Value table · 125
Transmission of messages · 127
Virtual channel · 50, 79
Transmission time · 92
Transmit branch · 122
Transmit list · 128 W
Transmit protocols · 32 Window
transparency color · 154 Trace window · 164
Transparency color · 145 Window control · 43
Transport protocols · 150 Window layout · 86
Trapezoidal function · 126 Working directory · 44
trigger · 157 write() · 111
Trigger · 60, 61, 62, 64, 67, 68, 70
Trigger block · 68
Z
Trigger condition · 60, 64, 70, 122, 123, 124,
128, 129 Zoom · 117
Trigger time point · 129 Zoom mode · 90
Trigger type · 64

© Vector Informatik GmbH CANoe/DENoe Manual Version 4.1.1

You might also like